Guest User

Untitled

a guest
Jun 16th, 2017
198
0
Never
Not a member of Pastebin yet? Sign Up, it unlocks many cool features!
text 382.91 KB | None | 0 0
  1. Chapter 1 - Our Picture of the Universe
  2. Chapter 2 - Space and Time
  3. Chapter 3 - The Expanding Universe
  4. Chapter 4 - The Uncertainty Principle
  5. Chapter 5 - Elementary Particles and the Forces of Nature
  6. Chapter 6 - Black Holes
  7. Chapter 7 - Black Holes Ain't So Black
  8. Chapter 8 - The Origin and Fate of the Universe
  9. Chapter 9 - The Arrow of Time
  10. Chapter 10 - Wormholes and Time Travel
  11. Chapter 11 - The Unification of Physics
  12. Chapter 12 - Conclusion
  13. Glossary
  14. Acknowledgments & About The Author
  15. FOREWARD
  16. I didn’t write a foreword to the original edition of A Brief History of Time. That was done by Carl Sagan. Instead,
  17. I wrote a short piece titled “Acknowledgments” in which I was advised to thank everyone. Some of the
  18. foundations that had given me support weren’t too pleased to have been mentioned, however, because it led to
  19. a great increase in applications.
  20. I don’t think anyone, my publishers, my agent, or myself, expected the book to do anything like as well as it did.
  21. It was in the London Sunday Times best-seller list for 237 weeks, longer than any other book (apparently, the
  22. Bible and Shakespeare aren’t counted). It has been translated into something like forty languages and has sold
  23. about one copy for every 750 men, women, and children in the world. As Nathan Myhrvold of Microsoft (a
  24. former post-doc of mine) remarked: I have sold more books on physics than Madonna has on sex.
  25. The success of A Brief History indicates that there is widespread interest in the big questions like: Where did
  26. we come from? And why is the universe the way it is?
  27. I have taken the opportunity to update the book and include new theoretical and observational results obtained
  28. since the book was first published (on April Fools’ Day, 1988). I have included a new chapter on wormholes
  29. and time travel. Einstein’s General Theory of Relativity seems to offer the possibility that we could create and
  30. maintain wormholes, little tubes that connect different regions of space-time. If so, we might be able to use
  31. them for rapid travel around the galaxy or travel back in time. Of course, we have not seen anyone from the
  32. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking
  33. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/A Brief History in Time.html (1 of 2) [2/20/2001 3:13:58 AM]
  34. future (or have we?) but I discuss a possible explanation for this.
  35. I also describe the progress that has been made recently in finding “dualities” or correspondences between
  36. apparently different theories of physics. These correspondences are a strong indication that there is a complete
  37. unified theory of physics, but they also suggest that it may not be possible to express this theory in a single
  38. fundamental formulation. Instead, we may have to use different reflections of the underlying theory in different
  39. situations. It might be like our being unable to represent the surface of the earth on a single map and having to
  40. use different maps in different regions. This would be a revolution in our view of the unification of the laws of
  41. science but it would not change the most important point: that the universe is governed by a set of rational laws
  42. that we can discover and understand.
  43. On the observational side, by far the most important development has been the measurement of fluctuations in
  44. the cosmic microwave background radiation by COBE (the Cosmic Background Explorer satellite) and other
  45. collaborations. These fluctuations are the finger-prints of creation, tiny initial irregularities in the otherwise
  46. smooth and uniform early universe that later grew into galaxies, stars, and all the structures we see around us.
  47. Their form agrees with the predictions of the proposal that the universe has no boundaries or edges in the
  48. imaginary time direction; but further observations will be necessary to distinguish this proposal from other
  49. possible explanations for the fluctuations in the background. However, within a few years we should know
  50. whether we can believe that we live in a universe that is completely self-contained and without beginning or
  51. end.
  52. Stephen Hawking
  53. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking
  54. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/A Brief History in Time.html (2 of 2) [2/20/2001 3:13:58 AM]
  55. CHAPTER 1
  56. OUR PICTURE OF THE UNIVERSE
  57. A well-known scientist (some say it was Bertrand Russell) once gave a public lecture on astronomy. He
  58. described how the earth orbits around the sun and how the sun, in turn, orbits around the center of a vast
  59. collection of stars called our galaxy. At the end of the lecture, a little old lady at the back of the room got up and
  60. said: “What you have told us is rubbish. The world is really a flat plate supported on the back of a giant
  61. tortoise.” The scientist gave a superior smile before replying, “What is the tortoise standing on.” “You’re very
  62. clever, young man, very clever,” said the old lady. “But it’s turtles all the way down!”
  63. Most people would find the picture of our universe as an infinite tower of tortoises rather ridiculous, but why do
  64. we think we know better? What do we know about the universe, and how do we know it? Where did the
  65. universe come from, and where is it going? Did the universe have a beginning, and if so, what happened before
  66. then? What is the nature of time? Will it ever come to an end? Can we go back in time? Recent breakthroughs
  67. in physics, made possible in part by fantastic new technologies, suggest answers to some of these
  68. longstanding questions. Someday these answers may seem as obvious to us as the earth orbiting the sun – or
  69. perhaps as ridiculous as a tower of tortoises. Only time (whatever that may be) will tell.
  70. As long ago as 340 BC the Greek philosopher Aristotle, in his book On the Heavens, was able to put forward
  71. two good arguments for believing that the earth was a round sphere rather than a Hat plate. First, he realized
  72. that eclipses of the moon were caused by the earth coming between the sun and the moon. The earth’s
  73. shadow on the moon was always round, which would be true only if the earth was spherical. If the earth had
  74. been a flat disk, the shadow would have been elongated and elliptical, unless the eclipse always occurred at a
  75. time when the sun was directly under the center of the disk. Second, the Greeks knew from their travels that
  76. the North Star appeared lower in the sky when viewed in the south than it did in more northerly regions. (Since
  77. the North Star lies over the North Pole, it appears to be directly above an observer at the North Pole, but to
  78. someone looking from the equator, it appears to lie just at the horizon. From the difference in the apparent
  79. position of the North Star in Egypt and Greece, Aristotle even quoted an estimate that the distance around the
  80. earth was 400,000 stadia. It is not known exactly what length a stadium was, but it may have been about 200
  81. yards, which would make Aristotle’s estimate about twice the currently accepted figure. The Greeks even had a
  82. third argument that the earth must be round, for why else does one first see the sails of a ship coming over the
  83. horizon, and only later see the hull?
  84. Aristotle thought the earth was stationary and that the sun, the moon, the planets, and the stars moved in
  85. circular orbits about the earth. He believed this because he felt, for mystical reasons, that the earth was the
  86. center of the universe, and that circular motion was the most perfect. This idea was elaborated by Ptolemy in
  87. the second century AD into a complete cosmological model. The earth stood at the center, surrounded by eight
  88. spheres that carried the moon, the sun, the stars, and the five planets known at the time, Mercury, Venus,
  89. Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.
  90. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  91. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (1 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  92. Figure 1:1
  93. The planets themselves moved on smaller circles attached to their respective spheres in order to account for
  94. their rather complicated observed paths in the sky. The outermost sphere carried the so-called fixed stars,
  95. which always stay in the same positions relative to each other but which rotate together across the sky. What
  96. lay beyond the last sphere was never made very clear, but it certainly was not part of mankind’s observable
  97. universe.
  98. Ptolemy’s model provided a reasonably accurate system for predicting the positions of heavenly bodies in the
  99. sky. But in order to predict these positions correctly, Ptolemy had to make an assumption that the moon
  100. followed a path that sometimes brought it twice as close to the earth as at other times. And that meant that the
  101. moon ought sometimes to appear twice as big as at other times! Ptolemy recognized this flaw, but nevertheless
  102. his model was generally, although not universally, accepted. It was adopted by the Christian church as the
  103. picture of the universe that was in accordance with Scripture, for it had the great advantage that it left lots of
  104. room outside the sphere of fixed stars for heaven and hell.
  105. A simpler model, however, was proposed in 1514 by a Polish priest, Nicholas Copernicus. (At first, perhaps for
  106. fear of being branded a heretic by his church, Copernicus circulated his model anonymously.) His idea was that
  107. the sun was stationary at the center and that the earth and the planets moved in circular orbits around the sun.
  108. Nearly a century passed before this idea was taken seriously. Then two astronomers – the German, Johannes
  109. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  110. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (2 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  111. Kepler, and the Italian, Galileo Galilei – started publicly to support the Copernican theory, despite the fact that
  112. the orbits it predicted did not quite match the ones observed. The death blow to the Aristotelian/Ptolemaic
  113. theory came in 1609. In that year, Galileo started observing the night sky with a telescope, which had just been
  114. invented. When he looked at the planet Jupiter, Galileo found that it was accompanied by several small
  115. satellites or moons that orbited around it. This implied that everything did not have to orbit directly around the
  116. earth, as Aristotle and Ptolemy had thought. (It was, of course, still possible to believe that the earth was
  117. stationary at the center of the universe and that the moons of Jupiter moved on extremely complicated paths
  118. around the earth, giving the appearance that they orbited Jupiter. However, Copernicus’s theory was much
  119. simpler.) At the same time, Johannes Kepler had modified Copernicus’s theory, suggesting that the planets
  120. moved not in circles but in ellipses (an ellipse is an elongated circle). The predictions now finally matched the
  121. observations.
  122. As far as Kepler was concerned, elliptical orbits were merely an ad hoc hypothesis, and a rather repugnant one
  123. at that, because ellipses were clearly less perfect than circles. Having discovered almost by accident that
  124. elliptical orbits fit the observations well, he could not reconcile them with his idea that the planets were made to
  125. orbit the sun by magnetic forces. An explanation was provided only much later, in 1687, when Sir Isaac Newton
  126. published his Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica, probably the most important single work ever
  127. published in the physical sciences. In it Newton not only put forward a theory of how bodies move in space and
  128. time, but he also developed the complicated mathematics needed to analyze those motions. In addition,
  129. Newton postulated a law of universal gravitation according to which each body in the universe was attracted
  130. toward every other body by a force that was stronger the more massive the bodies and the closer they were to
  131. each other. It was this same force that caused objects to fall to the ground. (The story that Newton was inspired
  132. by an apple hitting his head is almost certainly apocryphal. All Newton himself ever said was that the idea of
  133. gravity came to him as he sat “in a contemplative mood” and “was occasioned by the fall of an apple.”) Newton
  134. went on to show that, according to his law, gravity causes the moon to move in an elliptical orbit around the
  135. earth and causes the earth and the planets to follow elliptical paths around the sun.
  136. The Copernican model got rid of Ptolemy’s celestial spheres, and with them, the idea that the universe had a
  137. natural boundary. Since “fixed stars” did not appear to change their positions apart from a rotation across the
  138. sky caused by the earth spinning on its axis, it became natural to suppose that the fixed stars were objects like
  139. our sun but very much farther away.
  140. Newton realized that, according to his theory of gravity, the stars should attract each other, so it seemed they
  141. could not remain essentially motionless. Would they not all fall together at some point? In a letter in 1691 to
  142. Richard Bentley, another leading thinker of his day, Newton argued that this would indeed happen if there were
  143. only a finite number of stars distributed over a finite region of space. But he reasoned that if, on the other hand,
  144. there were an infinite number of stars, distributed more or less uniformly over infinite space, this would not
  145. happen, because there would not be any central point for them to fall to.
  146. This argument is an instance of the pitfalls that you can encounter in talking about infinity. In an infinite
  147. universe, every point can be regarded as the center, because every point has an infinite number of stars on
  148. each side of it. The correct approach, it was realized only much later, is to consider the finite situation, in which
  149. the stars all fall in on each other, and then to ask how things change if one adds more stars roughly uniformly
  150. distributed outside this region. According to Newton’s law, the extra stars would make no difference at all to the
  151. original ones on average, so the stars would fall in just as fast. We can add as many stars as we like, but they
  152. will still always collapse in on themselves. We now know it is impossible to have an infinite static model of the
  153. universe in which gravity is always attractive.
  154. It is an interesting reflection on the general climate of thought before the twentieth century that no one had
  155. suggested that the universe was expanding or contracting. It was generally accepted that either the universe
  156. had existed forever in an unchanging state, or that it had been created at a finite time in the past more or less
  157. as we observe it today. In part this may have been due to people’s tendency to believe in eternal truths, as well
  158. as the comfort they found in the thought that even though they may grow old and die, the universe is eternal
  159. and unchanging.
  160. Even those who realized that Newton’s theory of gravity showed that the universe could not be static did not
  161. think to suggest that it might be expanding. Instead, they attempted to modify the theory by making the
  162. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  163. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (3 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  164. gravitational force repulsive at very large distances. This did not significantly affect their predictions of the
  165. motions of the planets, but it allowed an infinite distribution of stars to remain in equilibrium – with the attractive
  166. forces between nearby stars balanced by the repulsive forces from those that were farther away. However, we
  167. now believe such an equilibrium would be unstable: if the stars in some region got only slightly nearer each
  168. other, the attractive forces between them would become stronger and dominate over the repulsive forces so
  169. that the stars would continue to fall toward each other. On the other hand, if the stars got a bit farther away
  170. from each other, the repulsive forces would dominate and drive them farther apart.
  171. Another objection to an infinite static universe is normally ascribed to the German philosopher Heinrich Olbers,
  172. who wrote about this theory in 1823. In fact, various contemporaries of Newton had raised the problem, and the
  173. Olbers article was not even the first to contain plausible arguments against it. It was, however, the first to be
  174. widely noted. The difficulty is that in an infinite static universe nearly every line of sight would end on the
  175. surface of a star. Thus one would expect that the whole sky would be as bright as the sun, even at night.
  176. Olbers’ counter-argument was that the light from distant stars would be dimmed by absorption by intervening
  177. matter. However, if that happened the intervening matter would eventually heat up until it glowed as brightly as
  178. the stars. The only way of avoiding the conclusion that the whole of the night sky should be as bright as the
  179. surface of the sun would be to assume that the stars had not been shining forever but had turned on at some
  180. finite time in the past. In that case the absorbing matter might not have heated up yet or the light from distant
  181. stars might not yet have reached us. And that brings us to the question of what could have caused the stars to
  182. have turned on in the first place.
  183. The beginning of the universe had, of course, been discussed long before this. According to a number of early
  184. cosmologies and the Jewish/Christian/Muslim tradition, the universe started at a finite, and not very distant,
  185. time in the past. One argument for such a beginning was the feeling that it was necessary to have “First Cause”
  186. to explain the existence of the universe. (Within the universe, you always explained one event as being caused
  187. by some earlier event, but the existence of the universe itself could be explained in this way only if it had some
  188. beginning.) Another argument was put forward by St. Augustine in his book The City of God. He pointed out
  189. that civilization is progressing and we remember who performed this deed or developed that technique. Thus
  190. man, and so also perhaps the universe, could not have been around all that long. St. Augustine accepted a
  191. date of about 5000 BC for the Creation of the universe according to the book of Genesis. (It is interesting that
  192. this is not so far from the end of the last Ice Age, about 10,000 BC, which is when archaeologists tell us that
  193. civilization really began.)
  194. Aristotle, and most of the other Greek philosophers, on the other hand, did not like the idea of a creation
  195. because it smacked too much of divine intervention. They believed, therefore, that the human race and the
  196. world around it had existed, and would exist, forever. The ancients had already considered the argument about
  197. progress described above, and answered it by saying that there had been periodic floods or other disasters that
  198. repeatedly set the human race right back to the beginning of civilization.
  199. The questions of whether the universe had a beginning in time and whether it is limited in space were later
  200. extensively examined by the philosopher Immanuel Kant in his monumental (and very obscure) work Critique of
  201. Pure Reason, published in 1781. He called these questions antinomies (that is, contradictions) of pure reason
  202. because he felt that there were equally compelling arguments for believing the thesis, that the universe had a
  203. beginning, and the antithesis, that it had existed forever. His argument for the thesis was that if the universe did
  204. not have a beginning, there would be an infinite period of time before any event, which he considered absurd.
  205. The argument for the antithesis was that if the universe had a beginning, there would be an infinite period of
  206. time before it, so why should the universe begin at any one particular time? In fact, his cases for both the thesis
  207. and the antithesis are really the same argument. They are both based on his unspoken assumption that time
  208. continues back forever, whether or not the universe had existed forever. As we shall see, the concept of time
  209. has no meaning before the beginning of the universe. This was first pointed out by St. Augustine. When asked:
  210. “What did God do before he created the universe?” Augustine didn’t reply: “He was preparing Hell for people
  211. who asked such questions.” Instead, he said that time was a property of the universe that God created, and
  212. that time did not exist before the beginning of the universe.
  213. When most people believed in an essentially static and unchanging universe, the question of whether or not it
  214. had a beginning was really one of metaphysics or theology. One could account for what was observed equally
  215. well on the theory that the universe had existed forever or on the theory that it was set in motion at some finite
  216. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  217. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (4 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  218. time in such a manner as to look as though it had existed forever. But in 1929, Edwin Hubble made the
  219. landmark observation that wherever you look, distant galaxies are moving rapidly away from us. In other words,
  220. the universe is expanding. This means that at earlier times objects would have been closer together. In fact, it
  221. seemed that there was a time, about ten or twenty thousand million years ago, when they were all at exactly
  222. the same place and when, therefore, the density of the universe was infinite. This discovery finally brought the
  223. question of the beginning of the universe into the realm of science.
  224. Hubble’s observations suggested that there was a time, called the big bang, when the universe was
  225. infinitesimally small and infinitely dense. Under such conditions all the laws of science, and therefore all ability
  226. to predict the future, would break down. If there were events earlier than this time, then they could not affect
  227. what happens at the present time. Their existence can be ignored because it would have no observational
  228. consequences. One may say that time had a beginning at the big bang, in the sense that earlier times simply
  229. would not be defined. It should be emphasized that this beginning in time is very different from those that had
  230. been considered previously. In an unchanging universe a beginning in time is something that has to be
  231. imposed by some being outside the universe; there is no physical necessity for a beginning. One can imagine
  232. that God created the universe at literally any time in the past. On the other hand, if the universe is expanding,
  233. there may be physical reasons why there had to be a beginning. One could still imagine that God created the
  234. universe at the instant of the big bang, or even afterwards in just such a way as to make it look as though there
  235. had been a big bang, but it would be meaningless to suppose that it was created before the big bang. An
  236. expanding universe does not preclude a creator, but it does place limits on when he might have carried out his
  237. job!
  238. In order to talk about the nature of the universe and to discuss questions such as whether it has a beginning or
  239. an end, you have to be clear about what a scientific theory is. I shall take the simpleminded view that a theory
  240. is just a model of the universe, or a restricted part of it, and a set of rules that relate quantities in the model to
  241. observations that we make. It exists only in our minds and does not have any other reality (whatever that might
  242. mean). A theory is a good theory if it satisfies two requirements. It must accurately describe a large class of
  243. observations on the basis of a model that contains only a few arbitrary elements, and it must make definite
  244. predictions about the results of future observations. For example, Aristotle believed Empedocles’s theory that
  245. everything was made out of four elements, earth, air, fire, and water. This was simple enough, but did not make
  246. any definite predictions. On the other hand, Newton’s theory of gravity was based on an even simpler model, in
  247. which bodies attracted each other with a force that was proportional to a quantity called their mass and
  248. inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. Yet it predicts the motions of the sun, the
  249. moon, and the planets to a high degree of accuracy.
  250. Any physical theory is always provisional, in the sense that it is only a hypothesis: you can never prove it. No
  251. matter how many times the results of experiments agree with some theory, you can never be sure that the next
  252. time the result will not contradict the theory. On the other hand, you can disprove a theory by finding even a
  253. single observation that disagrees with the predictions of the theory. As philosopher of science Karl Popper has
  254. emphasized, a good theory is characterized by the fact that it makes a number of predictions that could in
  255. principle be disproved or falsified by observation. Each time new experiments are observed to agree with the
  256. predictions the theory survives, and our confidence in it is increased; but if ever a new observation is found to
  257. disagree, we have to abandon or modify the theory.
  258. At least that is what is supposed to happen, but you can always question the competence of the person who
  259. carried out the observation.
  260. In practice, what often happens is that a new theory is devised that is really an extension of the previous theory.
  261. For example, very accurate observations of the planet Mercury revealed a small difference between its motion
  262. and the predictions of Newton’s theory of gravity. Einstein’s general theory of relativity predicted a slightly
  263. different motion from Newton’s theory. The fact that Einstein’s predictions matched what was seen, while
  264. Newton’s did not, was one of the crucial confirmations of the new theory. However, we still use Newton’s theory
  265. for all practical purposes because the difference between its predictions and those of general relativity is very
  266. small in the situations that we normally deal with. (Newton’s theory also has the great advantage that it is much
  267. simpler to work with than Einstein’s!)
  268. The eventual goal of science is to provide a single theory that describes the whole universe. However, the
  269. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  270. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (5 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  271. approach most scientists actually follow is to separate the problem into two parts. First, there are the laws that
  272. tell us how the universe changes with time. (If we know what the universe is like at any one time, these physical
  273. laws tell us how it will look at any later time.) Second, there is the question of the initial state of the universe.
  274. Some people feel that science should be concerned with only the first part; they regard the question of the
  275. initial situation as a matter for metaphysics or religion. They would say that God, being omnipotent, could have
  276. started the universe off any way he wanted. That may be so, but in that case he also could have made it
  277. develop in a completely arbitrary way. Yet it appears that he chose to make it evolve in a very regular way
  278. according to certain laws. It therefore seems equally reasonable to suppose that there are also laws governing
  279. the initial state.
  280. It turns out to be very difficult to devise a theory to describe the universe all in one go. Instead, we break the
  281. problem up into bits and invent a number of partial theories. Each of these partial theories describes and
  282. predicts a certain limited class of observations, neglecting the effects of other quantities, or representing them
  283. by simple sets of numbers. It may be that this approach is completely wrong. If everything in the universe
  284. depends on everything else in a fundamental way, it might be impossible to get close to a full solution by
  285. investigating parts of the problem in isolation. Nevertheless, it is certainly the way that we have made progress
  286. in the past. The classic example again is the Newtonian theory of gravity, which tells us that the gravitational
  287. force between two bodies depends only on one number associated with each body, its mass, but is otherwise
  288. independent of what the bodies are made of. Thus one does not need to have a theory of the structure and
  289. constitution of the sun and the planets in order to calculate their orbits.
  290. Today scientists describe the universe in terms of two basic partial theories – the general theory of relativity
  291. and quantum mechanics. They are the great intellectual achievements of the first half of this century. The
  292. general theory of relativity describes the force of gravity and the large-scale structure of the universe, that is,
  293. the structure on scales from only a few miles to as large as a million million million million (1 with twenty-four
  294. zeros after it) miles, the size of the observable universe. Quantum mechanics, on the other hand, deals with
  295. phenomena on extremely small scales, such as a millionth of a millionth of an inch. Unfortunately, however,
  296. these two theories are known to be inconsistent with each other – they cannot both be correct. One of the
  297. major endeavors in physics today, and the major theme of this book, is the search for a new theory that will
  298. incorporate them both – a quantum theory of gravity. We do not yet have such a theory, and we may still be a
  299. long way from having one, but we do already know many of the properties that it must have. And we shall see,
  300. in later chapters, that we already know a fair amount about the predications a quantum theory of gravity must
  301. make.
  302. Now, if you believe that the universe is not arbitrary, but is governed by definite laws, you ultimately have to
  303. combine the partial theories into a complete unified theory that will describe everything in the universe. But
  304. there is a fundamental paradox in the search for such a complete unified theory. The ideas about scientific
  305. theories outlined above assume we are rational beings who are free to observe the universe as we want and to
  306. draw logical deductions from what we see.
  307. In such a scheme it is reasonable to suppose that we might progress ever closer toward the laws that govern
  308. our universe. Yet if there really is a complete unified theory, it would also presumably determine our actions.
  309. And so the theory itself would determine the outcome of our search for it! And why should it determine that we
  310. come to the right conclusions from the evidence? Might it not equally well determine that we draw the wrong
  311. conclusion.? Or no conclusion at all?
  312. The only answer that I can give to this problem is based on Darwin’s principle of natural selection. The idea is
  313. that in any population of self-reproducing organisms, there will be variations in the genetic material and
  314. upbringing that different individuals have. These differences will mean that some individuals are better able
  315. than others to draw the right conclusions about the world around them and to act accordingly. These individuals
  316. will be more likely to survive and reproduce and so their pattern of behavior and thought will come to dominate.
  317. It has certainly been true in the past that what we call intelligence and scientific discovery have conveyed a
  318. survival advantage. It is not so clear that this is still the case: our scientific discoveries may well destroy us all,
  319. and even if they don’t, a complete unified theory may not make much difference to our chances of survival.
  320. However, provided the universe has evolved in a regular way, we might expect that the reasoning abilities that
  321. natural selection has given us would be valid also in our search for a complete unified theory, and so would not
  322. lead us to the wrong conclusions.
  323. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  324. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (6 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  325. Because the partial theories that we already have are sufficient to make accurate predictions in all but the most
  326. extreme situations, the search for the ultimate theory of the universe seems difficult to justify on practical
  327. grounds. (It is worth noting, though, that similar arguments could have been used against both relativity and
  328. quantum mechanics, and these theories have given us both nuclear energy and the microelectronics
  329. revolution!) The discovery of a complete unified theory, therefore, may not aid the survival of our species. It
  330. may not even affect our lifestyle. But ever since the dawn of civilization, people have not been content to see
  331. events as unconnected and inexplicable. They have craved an understanding of the underlying order in the
  332. world. Today we still yearn to know why we are here and where we came from. Humanity’s deepest desire for
  333. knowledge is justification enough for our continuing quest. And our goal is nothing less than a complete
  334. description of the universe we live in.
  335. PREVIOUS NEXT
  336. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 1
  337. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/n.html (7 of 7) [2/20/2001 3:14:06 AM]
  338. CHAPTER 2
  339. SPACE AND TIME
  340. Our present ideas about the motion of bodies date back to Galileo and Newton. Before them people believed
  341. Aristotle, who said that the natural state of a body was to be at rest and that it moved only if driven by a force or
  342. impulse. It followed that a heavy body should fall faster than a light one, because it would have a greater pull
  343. toward the earth.
  344. The Aristotelian tradition also held that one could work out all the laws that govern the universe by pure
  345. thought: it was not necessary to check by observation. So no one until Galileo bothered to see whether bodies
  346. of different weight did in fact fall at different speeds. It is said that Galileo demonstrated that Aristotle’s belief
  347. was false by dropping weights from the leaning tower of Pisa. The story is almost certainly untrue, but Galileo
  348. did do something equivalent: he rolled balls of different weights down a smooth slope. The situation is similar to
  349. that of heavy bodies falling vertically, but it is easier to observe because the Speeds are smaller. Galileo’s
  350. measurements indicated that each body increased its speed at the same rate, no matter what its weight. For
  351. example, if you let go of a ball on a slope that drops by one meter for every ten meters you go along, the ball
  352. will be traveling down the slope at a speed of about one meter per second after one second, two meters per
  353. second after two seconds, and so on, however heavy the ball. Of course a lead weight would fall faster than a
  354. feather, but that is only because a feather is slowed down by air resistance. If one drops two bodies that don’t
  355. have much air resistance, such as two different lead weights, they fall at the same rate. On the moon, where
  356. there is no air to slow things down, the astronaut David R. Scott performed the feather and lead weight
  357. experiment and found that indeed they did hit the ground at the same time.
  358. Galileo’s measurements were used by Newton as the basis of his laws of motion. In Galileo’s experiments, as a
  359. body rolled down the slope it was always acted on by the same force (its weight), and the effect was to make it
  360. constantly speed up. This showed that the real effect of a force is always to change the speed of a body, rather
  361. than just to set it moving, as was previously thought. It also meant that whenever a body is not acted on by any
  362. force, it will keep on moving in a straight line at the same speed. This idea was first stated explicitly in Newton’s
  363. Principia Mathematica, published in 1687, and is known as Newton’s first law. What happens to a body when a
  364. force does act on it is given by Newton’s second law. This states that the body will accelerate, or change its
  365. speed, at a rate that is proportional to the force. (For example, the acceleration is twice as great if the force is
  366. twice as great.) The acceleration is also smaller the greater the mass (or quantity of matter) of the body. (The
  367. same force acting on a body of twice the mass will produce half the acceleration.) A familiar example is
  368. provided by a car: the more powerful the engine, the greater the acceleration, but the heavier the car, the
  369. smaller the acceleration for the same engine. In addition to his laws of motion, Newton discovered a law to
  370. describe the force of gravity, which states that every body attracts every other body with a force that is
  371. proportional to the mass of each body. Thus the force between two bodies would be twice as strong if one of
  372. the bodies (say, body A) had its mass doubled. This is what you might expect because one could think of the
  373. new body A as being made of two bodies with the original mass. Each would attract body B with the original
  374. force. Thus the total force between A and B would be twice the original force. And if, say, one of the bodies had
  375. twice the mass, and the other had three times the mass, then the force would be six times as strong. One can
  376. now see why all bodies fall at the same rate: a body of twice the weight will have twice the force of gravity
  377. pulling it down, but it will also have twice the mass. According to Newton’s second law, these two effects will
  378. exactly cancel each other, so the acceleration will be the same in all cases.
  379. Newton’s law of gravity also tells us that the farther apart the bodies, the smaller the force. Newton’s law of
  380. gravity says that the gravitational attraction of a star is exactly one quarter that of a similar star at half the
  381. distance. This law predicts the orbits of the earth, the moon, and the planets with great accuracy. If the law
  382. were that the gravitational attraction of a star went down faster or increased more rapidly with distance, the
  383. orbits of the planets would not be elliptical, they would either spiral in to the sun or escape from the sun.
  384. The big difference between the ideas of Aristotle and those of Galileo and Newton is that Aristotle believed in a
  385. preferred state of rest, which any body would take up if it were not driven by some force Or impulse. In
  386. particular, he thought that the earth was at rest. But it follows from Newton’s laws that there is no unique
  387. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  388. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (1 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:15 AM]
  389. standard of rest. One could equally well say that body A was at rest and body B was moving at constant speed
  390. with respect to body A, or that body B was at rest and body A was moving. For example, if one sets aside for a
  391. moment the rotation of the earth and its orbit round the sun, one could say that the earth was at rest and that a
  392. train on it was traveling north at ninety miles per hour or that the train was at rest and the earth was moving
  393. south at ninety miles per hour. If one carried out experiments with moving bodies on the train, all Newton’s laws
  394. would still hold. For instance, playing Ping-Pong on the train, one would find that the ball obeyed Newton’s laws
  395. just like a ball on a table by the track. So there is no way to tell whether it is the train or the earth that is moving.
  396. The lack of an absolute standard of rest meant that one could not determine whether two events that took place
  397. at different times occurred in the same position in space. For example, suppose our Ping-Pong ball on the train
  398. bounces straight up and down, hitting the table twice on the same spot one second apart. To someone on the
  399. track, the two bounces would seem to take place about forty meters apart, because the train would have
  400. traveled that far down the track between the bounces. The nonexistence of absolute rest therefore meant that
  401. one could not give an event an absolute position in space, as Aristotle had believed. The positions of events
  402. and the distances between them would be different for a person on the train and one on the track, and there
  403. would be no reason to prefer one person’s position to the other’s.
  404. Newton was very worried by this lack of absolute position, or absolute space, as it was called, because it did
  405. not accord with his idea of an absolute God. In fact, he refused to accept lack of absolute space, even though it
  406. was implied by his laws. He was severely criticized for this irrational belief by many people, most notably by
  407. Bishop Berkeley, a philosopher who believed that all material objects and space and time are an illusion. When
  408. the famous Dr. Johnson was told of Berkeley’s opinion, he cried, “I refute it thus!” and stubbed his toe on a
  409. large stone.
  410. Both Aristotle and Newton believed in absolute time. That is, they believed that one could unambiguously
  411. measure the interval of time between two events, and that this time would be the same whoever measured it,
  412. provided they used a good clock. Time was completely separate from and independent of space. This is what
  413. most people would take to be the commonsense view. However, we have had to change our ideas about space
  414. and time. Although our apparently commonsense notions work well when dealing with things like apples, or
  415. planets that travel comparatively slowly, they don’t work at all for things moving at or near the speed of light.
  416. The fact that light travels at a finite, but very high, speed was first discovered in 1676 by the Danish astronomer
  417. Ole Christensen Roemer. He observed that the times at which the moons of Jupiter appeared to pass behind
  418. Jupiter were not evenly spaced, as one would expect if the moons went round Jupiter at a constant rate. As the
  419. earth and Jupiter orbit around the sun, the distance between them varies. Roemer noticed that eclipses of
  420. Jupiter’s moons appeared later the farther we were from Jupiter. He argued that this was because the light from
  421. the moons took longer to reach us when we were farther away. His measurements of the variations in the
  422. distance of the earth from Jupiter were, however, not very accurate, and so his value for the speed of light was
  423. 140,000 miles per second, compared to the modern value of 186,000 miles per second. Nevertheless,
  424. Roemer’s achievement, in not only proving that light travels at a finite speed, but also in measuring that speed,
  425. was remarkable – coming as it did eleven years before Newton’s publication of Principia Mathematica. A proper
  426. theory of the propagation of light didn’t come until 1865, when the British physicist James Clerk Maxwell
  427. succeeded in unifying the partial theories that up to then had been used to describe the forces of electricity and
  428. magnetism. Maxwell’s equations predicted that there could be wavelike disturbances in the combined
  429. electromagnetic field, and that these would travel at a fixed speed, like ripples on a pond. If the wavelength of
  430. these waves (the distance between one wave crest and the next) is a meter or more, they are what we now call
  431. radio waves. Shorter wavelengths are known as microwaves (a few centimeters) or infrared (more than a
  432. ten-thousandth of a centimeter). Visible light has a wavelength of between only forty and eighty millionths of a
  433. centimeter. Even shorter wavelengths are known as ultraviolet, X rays, and gamma rays.
  434. Maxwell’s theory predicted that radio or light waves should travel at a certain fixed speed. But Newton’s theory
  435. had got rid of the idea of absolute rest, so if light was supposed to travel at a fixed speed, one would have to
  436. say what that fixed speed was to be measured relative to.
  437. It was therefore suggested that there was a substance called the "ether" that was present everywhere, even in
  438. "empty" space. Light waves should travel through the ether as sound waves travel through air, and their speed
  439. should therefore be relative to the ether. Different observers, moving relative to the ether, would see light
  440. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  441. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (2 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:15 AM]
  442. coming toward them at different speeds, but light's speed relative to the ether would remain fixed. In particular,
  443. as the earth was moving through the ether on its orbit round the sun, the speed of light measured in the
  444. direction of the earth's motion through the ether (when we were moving toward the source of the light) should
  445. be higher than the speed of light at right angles to that motion (when we are not moving toward the source). In
  446. 1887Albert Michelson (who later became the first American to receive the Nobel Prize for physics) and Edward
  447. Morley carried out a very careful experiment at the Case School of Applied Science in Cleveland. They
  448. compared the speed of light in the direction of the earth's motion with that at right angles to the earth's motion.
  449. To their great surprise, they found they were exactly the same!
  450. Between 1887 and 1905 there were several attempts, most notably by the Dutch physicist Hendrik Lorentz, to
  451. explain the result of the Michelson-Morley experiment in terms of objects contracting and clocks slowing down
  452. when they moved through the ether. However, in a famous paper in 1905, a hitherto unknown clerk in the
  453. Swiss patent office, Albert Einstein, pointed out that the whole idea of an ether was unnecessary, providing one
  454. was willing to abandon the idea of absolute time. A similar point was made a few weeks later by a leading
  455. French mathematician, Henri Poincare. Einstein’s arguments were closer to physics than those of Poincare,
  456. who regarded this problem as mathematical. Einstein is usually given the credit for the new theory, but
  457. Poincare is remembered by having his name attached to an important part of it.
  458. The fundamental postulate of the theory of relativity, as it was called, was that the laws of science should be
  459. the same for all freely moving observers, no matter what their speed. This was true for Newton’s laws of
  460. motion, but now the idea was extended to include Maxwell’s theory and the speed of light: all observers should
  461. measure the same speed of light, no matter how fast they are moving. This simple idea has some remarkable
  462. consequences. Perhaps the best known are the equivalence of mass and energy, summed up in Einstein’s
  463. famous equation E=mc2 (where E is energy, m is mass, and c is the speed of light), and the law that nothing
  464. may travel faster than the speed of light. Because of the equivalence of energy and mass, the energy which an
  465. object has due to its motion will add to its mass. In other words, it will make it harder to increase its speed. This
  466. effect is only really significant for objects moving at speeds close to the speed of light. For example, at 10
  467. percent of the speed of light an object’s mass is only 0.5 percent more than normal, while at 90 percent of the
  468. speed of light it would be more than twice its normal mass. As an object approaches the speed of light, its mass
  469. rises ever more quickly, so it takes more and more energy to speed it up further. It can in fact never reach the
  470. speed of light, because by then its mass would have become infinite, and by the equivalence of mass and
  471. energy, it would have taken an infinite amount of energy to get it there. For this reason, any normal object is
  472. forever confined by relativity to move at speeds slower than the speed of light. Only light, or other waves that
  473. have no intrinsic mass, can move at the speed of light.
  474. An equally remarkable consequence of relativity is the way it has revolutionized our ideas of space and time. In
  475. Newton’s theory, if a pulse of light is sent from one place to another, different observers would agree on the
  476. time that the journey took (since time is absolute), but will not always agree on how far the light traveled (since
  477. space is not absolute). Since the speed of the light is just the distance it has traveled divided by the time it has
  478. taken, different observers would measure different speeds for the light. In relativity, on the other hand, all
  479. observers must agree on how fast light travels. They still, however, do not agree on the distance the light has
  480. traveled, so they must therefore now also disagree over the time it has taken. (The time taken is the distance
  481. the light has traveled – which the observers do not agree on – divided by the light’s speed – which they do
  482. agree on.) In other words, the theory of relativity put an end to the idea of absolute time! It appeared that each
  483. observer must have his own measure of time, as recorded by a clock carried with him, and that identical clocks
  484. carried by different observers would not necessarily agree.
  485. Each observer could use radar to say where and when an event took place by sending out a pulse of light or
  486. radio waves. Part of the pulse is reflected back at the event and the observer measures the time at which he
  487. receives the echo. The time of the event is then said to be the time halfway between when the pulse was sent
  488. and the time when the reflection was received back: the distance of the event is half the time taken for this
  489. round trip, multiplied by the speed of light. (An event, in this sense, is something that takes place at a single
  490. point in space, at a specified point in time.) This idea is shown here, which is an example of a space-time
  491. diagram...
  492. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  493. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (3 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  494. Figure 2:1
  495. Using this procedure, observers who are moving relative to each other will assign different times and positions
  496. to the same event. No particular observer’s measurements are any more correct than any other observer’s, but
  497. all the measurements are related. Any observer can work out precisely what time and position any other
  498. observer will assign to an event, provided he knows the other observer’s relative velocity.
  499. Nowadays we use just this method to measure distances precisely, because we can measure time more
  500. accurately than length. In effect, the meter is defined to be the distance traveled by light in
  501. 0.000000003335640952 second, as measured by a cesium clock. (The reason for that particular number is that
  502. it corresponds to the historical definition of the meter – in terms of two marks on a particular platinum bar kept
  503. in Paris.) Equally, we can use a more convenient, new unit of length called a light-second. This is simply
  504. defined as the distance that light travels in one second. In the theory of relativity, we now define distance in
  505. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  506. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (4 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  507. terms of time and the speed of light, so it follows automatically that every observer will measure light to have
  508. the same speed (by definition, 1 meter per 0.000000003335640952 second). There is no need to introduce the
  509. idea of an ether, whose presence anyway cannot be detected, as the Michelson-Morley experiment showed.
  510. The theory of relativity does, however, force us to change fundamentally our ideas of space and time. We must
  511. accept that time is not completely separate from and independent of space, but is combined with it to form an
  512. object called space-time.
  513. It is a matter of common experience that one can describe the position of a point in space by three numbers, or
  514. coordinates. For instance, one can say that a point in a room is seven feet from one wall, three feet from
  515. another, and five feet above the floor. Or one could specify that a point was at a certain latitude and longitude
  516. and a certain height above sea level. One is free to use any three suitable coordinates, although they have only
  517. a limited range of validity. One would not specify the position of the moon in terms of miles north and miles
  518. west of Piccadilly Circus and feet above sea level. Instead, one might describe it in terms of distance from the
  519. sun, distance from the plane of the orbits of the planets, and the angle between the line joining the moon to the
  520. sun and the line joining the sun to a nearby star such as Alpha Centauri. Even these coordinates would not be
  521. of much use in describing the position of the sun in our galaxy or the position of our galaxy in the local group of
  522. galaxies. In fact, one may describe the whole universe in terms of a collection of overlapping patches. In each
  523. patch, one can use a different set of three coordinates to specify the position of a point.
  524. An event is something that happens at a particular point in space and at a particular time. So one can specify it
  525. by four numbers or coordinates. Again, the choice of coordinates is arbitrary; one can use any three
  526. well-defined spatial coordinates and any measure of time. In relativity, there is no real distinction between the
  527. space and time coordinates, just as there is no real difference between any two space coordinates. One could
  528. choose a new set of coordinates in which, say, the first space coordinate was a combination of the old first and
  529. second space coordinates. For instance, instead of measuring the position of a point on the earth in miles north
  530. of Piccadilly and miles west of Piccadilly, one could use miles northeast of Piccadilly, and miles north-west of
  531. Piccadilly. Similarly, in relativity, one could use a new time coordinate that was the old time (in seconds) plus
  532. the distance (in light-seconds) north of Piccadilly.
  533. It is often helpful to think of the four coordinates of an event as specifying its position in a four-dimensional
  534. space called space-time. It is impossible to imagine a four-dimensional space. I personally find it hard enough
  535. to visualize three-dimensional space! However, it is easy to draw diagrams of two-dimensional spaces, such as
  536. the surface of the earth. (The surface of the earth is two-dimensional because the position of a point can be
  537. specified by two coordinates, latitude and longitude.) I shall generally use diagrams in which time increases
  538. upward and one of the spatial dimensions is shown horizontally. The other two spatial dimensions are ignored
  539. or, sometimes, one of them is indicated by perspective. (These are called space-time diagrams, like Figure
  540. 2:1.)
  541. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  542. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (5 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  543. Figure 2:2
  544. For example, in Figure 2:2 time is measured upward in years and the distance along the line from the sun to
  545. Alpha Centauri is measured horizontally in miles. The paths of the sun and of Alpha Centauri through
  546. space-time are shown as the vertical lines on the left and right of the diagram. A ray of light from the sun
  547. follows the diagonal line, and takes four years to get from the sun to Alpha Centauri.
  548. As we have seen, Maxwell’s equations predicted that the speed of light should be the same whatever the
  549. speed of the source, and this has been confirmed by accurate measurements. It follows from this that if a pulse
  550. of light is emitted at a particular time at a particular point in space, then as time goes on it will spread out as a
  551. sphere of light whose size and position are independent of the speed of the source. After one millionth of a
  552. second the light will have spread out to form a sphere with a radius of 300 meters; after two millionths of a
  553. second, the radius will be 600 meters; and so on. It will be like the ripples that spread out on the surface of a
  554. pond when a stone is thrown in. The ripples spread out as a circle that gets bigger as time goes on. If one
  555. stacks snapshots of the ripples at different times one above the other, the expanding circle of ripples will mark
  556. out a cone whose tip is at the place and time at which the stone hit the water Figure 2:3.
  557. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  558. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (6 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  559. Figure 2:3
  560. Similarly, the light spreading out from an event forms a (three-dimensional) cone in (the four-dimensional)
  561. space-time. This cone is called the future light cone of the event. In the same way we can draw another cone,
  562. called the past light cone, which is the set of events from which a pulse of light is able to reach the given event
  563. Figure 2:4.
  564. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  565. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (7 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  566. Figure 2:4
  567. Given an event P, one can divide the other events in the universe into three classes. Those events that can be
  568. reached from the event P by a particle or wave traveling at or below the speed of light are said to be in the
  569. future of P. They will lie within or on the expanding sphere of light emitted from the event P. Thus they will lie
  570. within or on the future light cone of P in the space-time diagram. Only events in the future of P can be affected
  571. by what happens at P because nothing can travel faster than light.
  572. Similarly, the past of P can be defined as the set of all events from which it is possible to reach the event P
  573. traveling at or below the speed of light. It is thus the set of events that can affect what happens at P. The
  574. events that do not lie in the future or past of P are said to lie in the elsewhere of P Figure 2:5.
  575. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  576. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (8 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  577. Figure 2:5
  578. What happens at such events can neither affect nor be affected by what happens at P. For example, if the sun
  579. were to cease to shine at this very moment, it would not affect things on earth at the present time because they
  580. would be in the elsewhere of the event when the sun went out Figure 2:6.
  581. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  582. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (9 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  583. Figure 2:6
  584. We would know about it only after eight minutes, the time it takes light to reach us from the sun. Only then
  585. would events on earth lie in the future light cone of the event at which the sun went out. Similarly, we do not
  586. know what is happening at the moment farther away in the universe: the light that we see from distant galaxies
  587. left them millions of years ago, and in the case of the most distant object that we have seen, the light left some
  588. eight thousand million years ago. Thus, when we look at the universe, we are seeing it as it was in the past.
  589. If one neglects gravitational effects, as Einstein and Poincare did in 1905, one has what is called the special
  590. theory of relativity. For every event in space-time we may construct a light cone (the set of all possible paths of
  591. light in space-time emitted at that event), and since the speed of light is the same at every event and in every
  592. direction, all the light cones will be identical and will all point in the same direction. The theory also tells us that
  593. nothing can travel faster than light. This means that the path of any object through space and time must be
  594. represented by a line that lies within the light cone at each event on it (Fig. 2.7). The special theory of relativity
  595. was very successful in explaining that the speed of light appears the same to all observers (as shown by the
  596. Michelson-Morley experiment) and in describing what happens when things move at speeds close to the speed
  597. of light. However, it was inconsistent with the Newtonian theory of gravity, which said that objects attracted
  598. each other with a force that depended on the distance between them. This meant that if one moved one of the
  599. objects, the force on the other one would change instantaneously. Or in other gravitational effects should travel
  600. with infinite velocity, instead of at or below the speed of light, as the special theory of relativity required.
  601. Einstein made a number of unsuccessful attempts between 1908 and 1914 to find a theory of gravity that was
  602. consistent with special relativity. Finally, in 1915, he proposed what we now call the general theory of relativity.
  603. Einstein made the revolutionary suggestion that gravity is not a force like other forces, but is a consequence of
  604. the fact that space-time is not flat, as had been previously assumed: it is curved, or “warped,” by the distribution
  605. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  606. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (10 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  607. of mass and energy in it. Bodies like the earth are not made to move on curved orbits by a force called gravity;
  608. instead, they follow the nearest thing to a straight path in a curved space, which is called a geodesic. A
  609. geodesic is the shortest (or longest) path between two nearby points. For example, the surface of the earth is a
  610. two-dimensional curved space. A geodesic on the earth is called a great circle, and is the shortest route
  611. between two points (Fig. 2.8). As the geodesic is the shortest path between any two airports, this is the route
  612. an airline navigator will tell the pilot to fly along. In general relativity, bodies always follow straight lines in
  613. four-dimensional space-time, but they nevertheless appear to us to move along curved paths in our
  614. three-dimensional space. (This is rather like watching an airplane flying over hilly ground. Although it follows a
  615. straight line in three-dimensional space, its shadow follows a curved path on the two-dimensional ground.)
  616. The mass of the sun curves space-time in such a way that although the earth follows a straight path in
  617. four-dimensional space-time, it appears to us to move along a circular orbit in three-dimensional space.
  618. Fact, the orbits of the planets predicted by general relativity are almost exactly the same as those predicted by
  619. the Newtonian theory of gravity. However, in the case of Mercury, which, being the nearest planet to the sun,
  620. feels the strongest gravitational effects, and has a rather elongated orbit, general relativity predicts that the long
  621. axis of the ellipse should rotate about the sun at a rate of about one degree in ten thousand years. Small
  622. though this effect is, it had been noticed before 1915 and served as one of the first confirmations of Einstein’s
  623. theory. In recent years the even smaller deviations of the orbits of the other planets from the Newtonian
  624. predictions have been measured by radar and found to agree with the predictions of general relativity.
  625. Light rays too must follow geodesics in space-time. Again, the fact that space is curved means that light no
  626. longer appears to travel in straight lines in space. So general relativity predicts that light should be bent by
  627. gravitational fields. For example, the theory predicts that the light cones of points near the sun would be slightly
  628. bent inward, on account of the mass of the sun. This means that light from a distant star that happened to pass
  629. near the sun would be deflected through a small angle, causing the star to appear in a different position to an
  630. observer on the earth (Fig. 2.9). Of course, if the light from the star always passed close to the sun, we would
  631. not be able to tell whether the light was being deflected or if instead the star was really where we see it.
  632. However, as the earth orbits around the sun, different stars appear to pass behind the sun and have their light
  633. deflected. They therefore change their apparent position relative to other stars. It is normally very difficult to see
  634. this effect, because the light from the sun makes it impossible to observe stars that appear near to the sun the
  635. sky. However, it is possible to do so during an eclipse of the sun, when the sun’s light is blocked out by the
  636. moon. Einstein’s prediction of light deflection could not be tested immediately in 1915, because the First World
  637. War was in progress, and it was not until 1919 that a British expedition, observing an eclipse from West Africa,
  638. showed that light was indeed deflected by the sun, just as predicted by the theory. This proof of a German
  639. theory by British scientists was hailed as a great act of reconciliation between the two countries after the war. It
  640. is ionic, therefore, that later examination of the photographs taken on that expedition showed the errors were as
  641. great as the effect they were trying to measure. Their measurement had been sheer luck, or a case of knowing
  642. the result they wanted to get, not an uncommon occurrence in science. The light deflection has, however, been
  643. accurately confirmed by a number of later observations.
  644. Another prediction of general relativity is that time should appear to slower near a massive body like the earth.
  645. This is because there is a relation between the energy of light and its frequency (that is, the number of waves of
  646. light per second): the greater the energy, the higher frequency. As light travels upward in the earth’s
  647. gravitational field, it loses energy, and so its frequency goes down. (This means that the length of time between
  648. one wave crest and the next goes up.) To someone high up, it would appear that everything down below was
  649. making longer to happen. This prediction was tested in 1962, using a pair of very accurate clocks mounted at
  650. the top and bottom of a water tower. The clock at the bottom, which was nearer the earth, was found to run
  651. slower, in exact agreement with general relativity. The difference in the speed of clocks at different heights
  652. above the earth is now of considerable practical importance, with the advent of very accurate navigation
  653. systems based on signals from satellites. If one ignored the predictions of general relativity, the position that
  654. one calculated would be wrong by several miles!
  655. Newton’s laws of motion put an end to the idea of absolute position in space. The theory of relativity gets rid of
  656. absolute time. Consider a pair of twins. Suppose that one twin goes to live on the top of a mountain while the
  657. other stays at sea level. The first twin would age faster than the second. Thus, if they met again, one would be
  658. older than the other. In this case, the difference in ages would be very small, but it would be much larger if one
  659. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  660. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (11 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  661. of the twins went for a long trip in a spaceship at nearly the speed of light. When he returned, he would be
  662. much younger than the one who stayed on earth. This is known as the twins paradox, but it is a paradox only if
  663. one has the idea of absolute time at the back of one’s mind. In the theory of relativity there is no unique
  664. absolute time, but instead each individual has his own personal measure of time that depends on where he is
  665. and how he is moving.
  666. Before 1915, space and time were thought of as a fixed arena in which events took place, but which was not
  667. affected by what happened in it. This was true even of the special theory of relativity. Bodies moved, forces
  668. attracted and repelled, but time and space simply continued, unaffected. It was natural to think that space and
  669. time went on forever.
  670. The situation, however, is quite different in the general theory of relativity. Space and time are now dynamic
  671. quantities: when a body moves, or a force acts, it affects the curvature of space and time – and in turn the
  672. structure of space-time affects the way in which bodies move and forces act. Space and time not only affect but
  673. also are affected by everything that happens in the universe. Just as one cannot talk about events in the
  674. universe without the notions of space and time, so in general relativity it became meaningless to talk about
  675. space and time outside the limits of the universe.
  676. In the following decades this new understanding of space and time was to revolutionize our view of the
  677. universe. The old idea of an essentially unchanging universe that could have existed, and could continue to
  678. exist, forever was replaced by the notion of a dynamic, expanding universe that seemed to have begun a finite
  679. time ago, and that might end at a finite time in the future. That revolution forms the subject of the next chapter.
  680. And years later, it was also to be the starting point for my work in theoretical physics. Roger Penrose and I
  681. showed that Einstein’s general theory of relativity implied that the universe must have a beginning and,
  682. possibly, an end.
  683. PREVIOUS NEXT
  684. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 2
  685. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/a.html (12 of 12) [2/20/2001 3:14:16 AM]
  686. CHAPTER 3
  687. THE EXPANDING UNIVERSE
  688. If one looks at the sky on a clear, moonless night, the brightest objects one sees are likely to be the planets
  689. Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn. There will also be a very large number of stars, which are just like our own
  690. sun but much farther from us. Some of these fixed stars do, in fact, appear to change very slightly their
  691. positions relative to each other as earth orbits around the sun: they are not really fixed at all! This is because
  692. they are comparatively near to us. As the earth goes round the sun, we see them from different positions
  693. against the background of more distant stars. This is fortunate, because it enables us to measure directly the
  694. distance of these stars from us: the nearer they are, the more they appear to move. The nearest star, called
  695. Proxima Centauri, is found to be about four light-years away (the light from it takes about four years to reach
  696. earth), or about twenty-three million million miles. Most of the other stars that are visible to the naked eye lie
  697. within a few hundred light-years of us. Our sun, for comparison, is a mere light-minutes away! The visible stars
  698. appear spread all over the night sky, but are particularly concentrated in one band, which we call the Milky
  699. Way. As long ago as 1750, some astronomers were suggesting that the appearance of the Milky Way could be
  700. explained if most of the visible stars lie in a single disklike configuration, one example of what we now call a
  701. spiral galaxy. Only a few decades later, the astronomer Sir William Herschel confirmed this idea by
  702. painstakingly cataloging the positions and distances of vast numbers of stars. Even so, the idea gained
  703. complete acceptance only early this century.
  704. Our modern picture of the universe dates back to only 1924, when the American astronomer Edwin Hubble
  705. demonstrated that ours was not the only galaxy. There were in fact many others, with vast tracts of empty
  706. space between them. In order to prove this, he needed to determine the distances to these other galaxies,
  707. which are so far away that, unlike nearby stars, they really do appear fixed. Hubble was forced, therefore, to
  708. use indirect methods to measure the distances. Now, the apparent brightness of a star depends on two factors:
  709. how much light it radiates (its luminosity), and how far it is from us. For nearby stars, we can measure their
  710. apparent brightness and their distance, and so we can work out their luminosity. Conversely, if we knew the
  711. luminosity of stars in other galaxies, we could work out their distance by measuring their apparent brightness.
  712. Hubble noted that certain types of stars always have the same luminosity when they are near enough for us to
  713. measure; therefore, he argued, if we found such stars in another galaxy, we could assume that they had the
  714. same luminosity – and so calculate the distance to that galaxy. If we could do this for a number of stars in the
  715. same galaxy, and our calculations always gave the same distance, we could be fairly confident of our estimate.
  716. In this way, Edwin Hubble worked out the distances to nine different galaxies. We now know that our galaxy is
  717. only one of some hundred thousand million that can be seen using modern telescopes, each galaxy itself
  718. containing some hundred thousand million stars. Figure 3:1 shows a picture of one spiral galaxy that is similar
  719. to what we think ours must look like to someone living in another galaxy.
  720. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  721. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (1 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  722. Figure 3:1
  723. We live in a galaxy that is about one hundred thousand light-years across and is slowly rotating; the stars in its
  724. spiral arms orbit around its center about once every several hundred million years. Our sun is just an ordinary,
  725. average-sized, yellow star, near the inner edge of one of the spiral arms. We have certainly come a long way
  726. since Aristotle and Ptolemy, when thought that the earth was the center of the universe!
  727. Stars are so far away that they appear to us to be just pinpoints of light. We cannot see their size or shape. So
  728. how can we tell different types of stars apart? For the vast majority of stars, there is only one characteristic
  729. feature that we can observe – the color of their light. Newton discovered that if light from the sun passes
  730. through a triangular-shaped piece of glass, called a prism, it breaks up into its component colors (its spectrum)
  731. as in a rainbow. By focusing a telescope on an individual star or galaxy, one can similarly observe the spectrum
  732. of the light from that star or galaxy. Different stars have different spectra, but the relative brightness of the
  733. different colors is always exactly what one would expect to find in the light emitted by an object that is glowing
  734. red hot. (In fact, the light emitted by any opaque object that is glowing red hot has a characteristic spectrum
  735. that depends only on its temperature – a thermal spectrum. This means that we can tell a star’s temperature
  736. from the spectrum of its light.) Moreover, we find that certain very specific colors are missing from stars’
  737. spectra, and these missing colors may vary from star to star. Since we know that each chemical element
  738. absorbs a characteristic set of very specific colors, by matching these to those that are missing from a star’s
  739. spectrum, we can determine exactly which elements are present in the star’s atmosphere.
  740. In the 1920s, when astronomers began to look at the spectra of stars in other galaxies, they found something
  741. most peculiar: there were the same characteristic sets of missing colors as for stars in our own galaxy, but they
  742. were all shifted by the same relative amount toward the red end of the spectrum. To understand the
  743. implications of this, we must first understand the Doppler effect. As we have seen, visible light consists of
  744. fluctuations, or waves, in the electromagnetic field. The wavelength (or distance from one wave crest to the
  745. next) of light is extremely small, ranging from four to seven ten-millionths of a meter. The different wavelengths
  746. of light are what the human eye sees as different colors, with the longest wavelengths appearing at the red end
  747. of the spectrum and the shortest wavelengths at the blue end. Now imagine a source of light at a constant
  748. distance from us, such as a star, emitting waves of light at a constant wavelength. Obviously the wavelength of
  749. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  750. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (2 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  751. the waves we receive will be the same as the wavelength at which they are emitted (the gravitational field of the
  752. galaxy will not be large enough to have a significant effect). Suppose now that the source starts moving toward
  753. us. When the source emits the next wave crest it will be nearer to us, so the distance between wave crests will
  754. be smaller than when the star was stationary. This means that the wavelength of the waves we receive is
  755. shorter than when the star was stationary. Correspondingly, if the source is moving away from us, the
  756. wavelength of the waves we receive will be longer. In the case of light, therefore, means that stars moving
  757. away from us will have their spectra shifted toward the red end of the spectrum (red-shifted) and those moving
  758. toward us will have their spectra blue-shifted. This relationship between wavelength and speed, which is called
  759. the Doppler effect, is an everyday experience. Listen to a car passing on the road: as the car is approaching, its
  760. engine sounds at a higher pitch (corresponding to a shorter wavelength and higher frequency of sound waves),
  761. and when it passes and goes away, it sounds at a lower pitch. The behavior of light or radio waves is similar.
  762. Indeed, the police make use of the Doppler effect to measure the speed of cars by measuring the wavelength
  763. of pulses of radio waves reflected off them.
  764. ln the years following his proof of the existence of other galaxies, Rubble spent his time cataloging their
  765. distances and observing their spectra. At that time most people expected the galaxies to be moving around
  766. quite randomly, and so expected to find as many blue-shifted spectra as red-shifted ones. It was quite a
  767. surprise, therefore, to find that most galaxies appeared red-shifted: nearly all were moving away from us! More
  768. surprising still was the finding that Hubble published in 1929: even the size of a galaxy’s red shift is not random,
  769. but is directly proportional to the galaxy’s distance from us. Or, in other words, the farther a galaxy is, the faster
  770. it is moving away! And that meant that the universe could not be static, as everyone previously had thought, is
  771. in fact expanding; the distance between the different galaxies is changing all the time.
  772. The discovery that the universe is expanding was one of the great intellectual revolutions of the twentieth
  773. century. With hindsight, it is easy wonder why no one had thought of it before. Newton, and others should have
  774. realized that a static universe would soon start to contract under the influence of gravity. But suppose instead
  775. that the universe is expanding. If it was expanding fairly slowly, the force of gravity would cause it eventually to
  776. stop expanding and then to start contracting. However, if it was expanding at more than a certain critical rate,
  777. gravity would never be strong enough to stop it, and the universe would continue to expand forever. This is a bit
  778. like what happens when one fires a rocket upward from the surface of the earth. If it has a fairly low speed,
  779. gravity will eventually stop the rocket and it will start falling back. On the other hand, if the rocket has more than
  780. a certain critical speed (about seven miles per second), gravity will not be strong enough to pull it back, so it will
  781. keep going away from the earth forever. This behavior of the universe could have been predicted from
  782. Newton’s theory of gravity at any time in the nineteenth, the eighteenth, or even the late seventeenth century.
  783. Yet so strong was the belief in a static universe that it persisted into the early twentieth century. Even Einstein,
  784. when he formulated the general theory of relativity in 1915, was so sure that the universe had to be static that
  785. he modified his theory to make this possible, introducing a so-called cosmological constant into his equations.
  786. Einstein introduced a new “antigravity” force, which, unlike other forces, did not come from any particular
  787. source but was built into the very fabric of space-time. He claimed that space-time had an inbuilt tendency to
  788. expand, and this could be made to balance exactly the attraction of all the matter in the universe, so that a
  789. static universe would result. Only one man, it seems, was willing to take general relativity at face value, and
  790. while Einstein and other physicists were looking for ways of avoiding general relativity’s prediction of a
  791. nonstatic universe, the Russian physicist and mathematician Alexander Friedmann instead set about explaining
  792. it.
  793. Friedmann made two very simple assumptions about the universe: that the universe looks identical in
  794. whichever direction we look, and that this would also be true if we were observing the universe from anywhere
  795. else. From these two ideas alone, Friedmann showed that we should not expect the universe to be static. In
  796. fact, in 1922, several years before Edwin Hubble’s discovery, Friedmann predicted exactly what Hubble found!
  797. The assumption that the universe looks the same in every direction is clearly not true in reality. For example, as
  798. we have seen, the other stars in our galaxy form a distinct band of light across the night sky, called the Milky
  799. Way. But if we look at distant galaxies, there seems to be more or less the same number of them. So the
  800. universe does seem to be roughly the same in every direction, provided one views it on a large scale compared
  801. to the distance between galaxies, and ignores the differences on small scales. For a long time, this was
  802. sufficient justification for Friedmann’s assumption – as a rough approximation to the real universe. But more
  803. recently a lucky accident uncovered the fact that Friedmann’s assumption is in fact a remarkably accurate
  804. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  805. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (3 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  806. description of our universe.
  807. In 1965 two American physicists at the Bell Telephone Laboratories in New Jersey, Arno Penzias and Robert
  808. Wilson, were testing a very sensitive microwave detector. (Microwaves are just like light waves, but with a
  809. wavelength of around a centimeter.) Penzias and Wilson were worried when they found that their detector was
  810. picking up more noise than it ought to. The noise did not appear to be coming from any particular direction.
  811. First they discovered bird droppings in their detector and checked for other possible malfunctions, but soon
  812. ruled these out. They knew that any noise from within the atmosphere would be stronger when the detector
  813. was not pointing straight up than when it was, because light rays travel through much more atmosphere when
  814. received from near the horizon than when received from directly overhead. The extra noise was the same
  815. whichever direction the detector was pointed, so it must come from outside the atmosphere. It was also the
  816. same day and night and throughout the year, even though the earth was rotating on its axis and orbiting around
  817. the sun. This showed that the radiation must come from beyond the Solar System, and even from beyond the
  818. galaxy, as otherwise it would vary as the movement of earth pointed the detector in different directions.
  819. In fact, we know that the radiation must have traveled to us across most of the observable universe, and since
  820. it appears to be the same in different directions, the universe must also be the same in every direction, if only
  821. on a large scale. We now know that whichever direction we look, this noise never varies by more than a tiny
  822. fraction: so Penzias and Wilson had unwittingly stumbled across a remarkably accurate confirmation of
  823. Friedmann’s first assumption. However, because the universe is not exactly the same in every direction, but
  824. only on average on a large scale, the microwaves cannot be exactly the same in every direction either. There
  825. have to be slight variations between different directions. These were first detected in 1992 by the Cosmic
  826. Background Explorer satellite, or COBE, at a level of about one part in a hundred thousand. Small though these
  827. variations are, they are very important, as will be explained in Chapter 8.
  828. At roughly the same time as Penzias and Wilson were investigating noise in their detector, two American
  829. physicists at nearby Princeton University, Bob Dicke and Jim Peebles, were also taking an interest in
  830. microwaves. They were working on a suggestion, made by George Gamow (once a student of Alexander
  831. Friedmann), that the early universe should have been very hot and dense, glowing white hot. Dicke and
  832. Peebles argued that we should still be able to see the glow of the early universe, because light from very
  833. distant parts of it would only just be reaching us now. However, the expansion of the universe meant that this
  834. light should be so greatly red-shifted that it would appear to us now as microwave radiation. Dicke and Peebles
  835. were preparing to look for this radiation when Penzias and Wilson heard about their work and realized that they
  836. had already found it. For this, Penzias and Wilson were awarded the Nobel Prize in 1978 (which seems a bit
  837. hard on Dicke and Peebles, not to mention Gamow!).
  838. Now at first sight, all this evidence that the universe looks the same whichever direction we look in might seem
  839. to suggest there is something special about our place in the universe. In particular, it might seem that if we
  840. observe all other galaxies to be moving away from us, then we must be at the center of the universe. There is,
  841. however, an alternate explanation: the universe might look the same in every direction as seen from any other
  842. galaxy too. This, as we have seen, was Friedmann’s second assumption. We have no scientific evidence for, or
  843. against, this assumption. We believe it only on grounds of modesty: it would be most remarkable if the universe
  844. looked the same in every direction around us, but not around other points in the universe! In Friedmann’s
  845. model, all the galaxies are moving directly away from each other. The situation is rather like a balloon with a
  846. number of spots painted on it being steadily blown up. As the balloon expands, the distance between any two
  847. spots increases, but there is no spot that can be said to be the center of the expansion. Moreover, the farther
  848. apart the spots are, the faster they will be moving apart. Similarly, in Friedmann’s model the speed at which any
  849. two galaxies are moving apart is proportional to the distance between them. So it predicted that the red shift of
  850. a galaxy should be directly proportional to its distance from us, exactly as Hubble found. Despite the success of
  851. his model and his prediction of Hubble’s observations, Friedmann’s work remained largely unknown in the West
  852. until similar models were discovered in 1935 by the American physicist Howard Robertson and the British
  853. mathematician Arthur Walker, in response to Hubble’s discovery of the uniform expansion of the universe.
  854. Although Friedmann found only one, there are in fact three different kinds of models that obey Friedmann’s two
  855. fundamental assumptions. In the first kind (which Friedmann found) the universe is expanding sufficiently
  856. slowly that the gravitational attraction between the different galaxies causes the expansion to slow down and
  857. eventually to stop. The galaxies then start to move toward each other and the universe contracts.
  858. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  859. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (4 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  860. Figure 3:2
  861. Figure 3:2 shows how the distance between two neighboring galaxies changes as time increases. It starts at
  862. zero, increases to a maximum, and then decreases to zero again. In the second kind of solution, the universe is
  863. expanding so rapidly that the gravitational attraction can never stop it, though it does slow it down a bit.
  864. Figure 3:3
  865. Figure 3:3 Shows the Separation between neighboring galaxies in this model. It starts at zero and eventually
  866. the galaxies are moving apart at a steady speed. Finally, there is a third kind of solution, in which the universe
  867. is expanding only just fast enough to avoid recollapse.
  868. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  869. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (5 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  870. Figure 3:4
  871. In this case the separation, shown in Figure 3:4, also starts at zero and increases forever. However, the speed
  872. at which the galaxies are moving apart gets smaller and smaller, although it never quite reaches zero.
  873. A remarkable feature of the first kind of Friedmann model is that in it the universe is not infinite in space, but
  874. neither does space have any boundary. Gravity is so strong that space is bent round onto itself, making it rather
  875. like the surface of the earth. If one keeps traveling in a certain direction on the surface of the earth, one never
  876. comes up against an impassable barrier or falls over the edge, but eventually comes back to where one
  877. started.
  878. In the first kind of Friedmann model, space is just like this, but with three dimensions instead of two for the
  879. earth’s surface. The fourth dimension, time, is also finite in extent, but it is like a line with two ends or
  880. boundaries, a beginning and an end. We shall see later that when one combines general relativity with the
  881. uncertainty principle of quantum mechanics, it is possible for both space and time to be finite without any edges
  882. or boundaries.
  883. The idea that one could go right round the universe and end up where one started makes good science fiction,
  884. but it doesn’t have much practical significance, because it can be shown that the universe would recollapse to
  885. zero size before one could get round. You would need to travel faster than light in order to end up where you
  886. started before the universe came to an end – and that is not allowed!
  887. In the first kind of Friedmann model, which expands and recollapses, space is bent in on itself, like the surface
  888. of the earth. It is therefore finite in extent. In the second kind of model, which expands forever, space is bent
  889. the other way, like the surface of a saddle. So in this case space is infinite. Finally, in the third kind of
  890. Friedmann model, with just the critical rate of expansion, space is flat (and therefore is also infinite).
  891. But which Friedmann model describes our universe? Will the universe eventually stop expanding and start
  892. contracting, or will it expand forever? To answer this question we need to know the present rate of expansion of
  893. the universe and its present average density. If the density is less than a certain critical value, determined by
  894. the rate of expansion, the gravitational attraction will be too weak to halt the expansion. If the density is greater
  895. than the critical value, gravity will stop the expansion at some time in the future and cause the universe to
  896. recollapse.
  897. We can determine the present rate of expansion by measuring the velocities at which other galaxies are
  898. moving away from us, using the Doppler effect. This can be done very accurately. However, the distances to
  899. the galaxies are not very well known because we can only measure them indirectly. So all we know is that the
  900. universe is expanding by between 5 percent and 10 percent every thousand million years. However, our
  901. uncertainty about the present average density of the universe is even greater. If we add up the masses of all
  902. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  903. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (6 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  904. the stars that we can see in our galaxy and other galaxies, the total is less than one hundredth of the amount
  905. required to halt the expansion of the universe, even for the lowest estimate of the rate of expansion. Our galaxy
  906. and other galaxies, however, must contain a large amount of “dark matter” that we cannot see directly, but
  907. which we know must be there because of the influence of its gravitational attraction on the orbits of stars in the
  908. galaxies. Moreover, most galaxies are found in clusters, and we can similarly infer the presence of yet more
  909. dark matter in between the galaxies in these clusters by its effect on the motion of the galaxies. When we add
  910. up all this dark matter, we still get only about one tenth of the amount required to halt the expansion. However,
  911. we cannot exclude the possibility that there might be some other form of matter, distributed almost uniformly
  912. throughout the universe, that we have not yet detected and that might still raise the average density of the
  913. universe up to the critical value needed to halt the expansion. The present evidence therefore suggests that the
  914. universe will probably expand forever, but all we can really be sure of is that even if the universe is going to
  915. recollapse, it won’t do so for at least another ten thousand million years, since it has already been expanding
  916. for at least that long. This should not unduly worry us: by that time, unless we have colonized beyond the Solar
  917. System, mankind will long since have died out, extinguished along with our sun!
  918. All of the Friedmann solutions have the feature that at some time in the past (between ten and twenty thousand
  919. million years ago) the distance between neighboring galaxies must have been zero. At that time, which we call
  920. the big bang, the density of the universe and the curvature of space-time would have been infinite. Because
  921. mathematics cannot really handle infinite numbers, this means that the general theory of relativity (on which
  922. Friedmann’s solutions are based) predicts that there is a point in the universe where the theory itself breaks
  923. down. Such a point is an example of what mathematicians call a singularity. In fact, all our theories of science
  924. are formulated on the assumption that space-time is smooth and nearly fiat, so they break down at the big bang
  925. singularity, where the curvature of space-time is infinite. This means that even if there were events before the
  926. big bang, one could not use them to determine what would happen afterward, because predictability would
  927. break down at the big bang.
  928. Correspondingly, if, as is the case, we know only what has happened since the big bang, we could not
  929. determine what happened beforehand. As far as we are concerned, events before the big bang can have no
  930. consequences, so they should not form part of a scientific model of the universe. We should therefore cut them
  931. out of the model and say that time had a beginning at the big bang.
  932. Many people do not like the idea that time has a beginning, probably because it smacks of divine intervention.
  933. (The Catholic Church, on the other hand, seized on the big bang model and in 1951officially pronounced it to
  934. be in accordance with the Bible.) There were therefore a number of attempts to avoid the conclusion that there
  935. had been a big bang. The proposal that gained widest support was called the steady state theory. It was
  936. suggested in 1948 by two refugees from Nazi-occupied Austria, Hermann Bondi and Thomas Gold, together
  937. with a Briton, Fred Hoyle, who had worked with them on the development of radar during the war. The idea was
  938. that as the galaxies moved away from each other, new galaxies were continually forming in the gaps in
  939. between, from new matter that was being continually created. The universe would therefore look roughly the
  940. same at all times as well as at all points of space. The steady state theory required a modification of general
  941. relativity to allow for the continual creation of matter, but the rate that was involved was so low (about one
  942. particle per cubic kilometer per year) that it was not in conflict with experiment. The theory was a good scientific
  943. theory, in the sense described in Chapter 1: it was simple and it made definite predictions that could be tested
  944. by observation. One of these predictions was that the number of galaxies or similar objects in any given volume
  945. of space should be the same wherever and whenever we look in the universe. In the late 1950s and early
  946. 1960s a survey of sources of radio waves from outer space was carried out at Cambridge by a group of
  947. astronomers led by Martin Ryle (who had also worked with Bondi, Gold, and Hoyle on radar during the war).
  948. The Cambridge group showed that most of these radio sources must lie outside our galaxy (indeed many of
  949. them could be identified with other galaxies) and also that there were many more weak sources than strong
  950. ones. They interpreted the weak sources as being the more distant ones, and the stronger ones as being
  951. nearer. Then there appeared to be less common sources per unit volume of space for the nearby sources than
  952. for the distant ones. This could mean that we are at the center of a great region in the universe in which the
  953. sources are fewer than elsewhere. Alternatively, it could mean that the sources were more numerous in the
  954. past, at the time that the radio waves left on their journey to us, than they are now. Either explanation
  955. contradicted the predictions of the steady state theory. Moreover, the discovery of the microwave radiation by
  956. Penzias and Wilson in 1965 also indicated that the universe must have been much denser in the past. The
  957. steady state theory therefore had to be abandoned.
  958. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  959. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (7 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  960. Another attempt to avoid the conclusion that there must have been a big bang, and therefore a beginning of
  961. time, was made by two Russian scientists, Evgenii Lifshitz and Isaac Khalatnikov, in 1963. They suggested that
  962. the big bang might be a peculiarity of Friedmann’s models alone, which after all were only approximations to
  963. the real universe. Perhaps, of all the models that were roughly like the real universe, only Friedmann’s would
  964. contain a big bang singularity. In Friedmann’s models, the galaxies are all moving directly away from each
  965. other – so it is not surprising that at some time in the past they were all at the same place. In the real universe,
  966. however, the galaxies are not just moving directly away from each other – they also have small sideways
  967. velocities. So in reality they need never have been all at exactly the same place, only very close together.
  968. Perhaps then the current expanding universe resulted not from a big bang singularity, but from an earlier
  969. contracting phase; as the universe had collapsed the particles in it might not have all collided, but had flown
  970. past and then away from each other, producing the present expansion of the the universe that were roughly like
  971. Friedmann’s models but took account of the irregularities and random velocities of galaxies in the real universe.
  972. They showed that such models could start with a big bang, even though the galaxies were no longer always
  973. moving directly away from each other, but they claimed that this was still only possible in certain exceptional
  974. models in which the galaxies were all moving in just the right way. They argued that since there seemed to be
  975. infinitely more Friedmann-like models without a big bang singularity than there were with one, we should
  976. conclude that there had not in reality been a big bang. They later realized, however, that there was a much
  977. more general class of Friedmann-like models that did have singularities, and in which the galaxies did not have
  978. to be moving any special way. They therefore withdrew their claim in 1970.
  979. The work of Lifshitz and Khalatnikov was valuable because it showed that the universe could have had a
  980. singularity, a big bang, if the general theory of relativity was correct. However, it did not resolve the crucial
  981. question: Does general relativity predict that our universe should have had a big bang, a beginning of time?
  982. The answer to this carne out of a completely different approach introduced by a British mathematician and
  983. physicist, Roger Penrose, in 1965. Using the way light cones behave in general relativity, together with the fact
  984. that gravity is always attractive, he showed that a star collapsing under its own gravity is trapped in a region
  985. whose surface eventually shrinks to zero size. And, since the surface of the region shrinks to zero, so too must
  986. its volume. All the matter in the star will be compressed into a region of zero volume, so the density of matter
  987. and the curvature of space-time become infinite. In other words, one has a singularity contained within a region
  988. of space-time known as a black hole.
  989. At first sight, Penrose’s result applied only to stars; it didn’t have anything to say about the question of whether
  990. the entire universe had a big bang singularity in its past. However, at the time that Penrose produced his
  991. theorem, I was a research student desperately looking for a problem with which to complete my Ph.D. thesis.
  992. Two years before, I had been diagnosed as suffering from ALS, commonly known as Lou Gehrig’s disease, or
  993. motor neuron disease, and given to understand that I had only one or two more years to live. In these
  994. circumstances there had not seemed much point in working on my Ph.D.– I did not expect to survive that long.
  995. Yet two years had gone by and I was not that much worse. In fact, things were going rather well for me and I
  996. had gotten engaged to a very nice girl, Jane Wilde. But in order to get married, I needed a job, and in order to
  997. get a job, I needed a Ph.D.
  998. In 1965 I read about Penrose’s theorem that any body undergoing gravitational collapse must eventually form a
  999. singularity. I soon realized that if one reversed the direction of time in Penrose’s theorem, so that the collapse
  1000. became an expansion, the conditions of his theorem would still hold, provided the universe were roughly like a
  1001. Friedmann model on large scales at the present time. Penrose’s theorem had shown that any collapsing star
  1002. must end in a singularity; the time-reversed argument showed that any Friedmann-like expanding universe
  1003. must have begun with a singularity. For technical reasons, Penrose’s theorem required that the universe be
  1004. infinite in space. So I could in fact, use it to prove that there should be a singularity only if the universe was
  1005. expanding fast enough to avoid collapsing again (since only those Friedmann models were infinite in space).
  1006. During the next few years I developed new mathematical techniques to remove this and other technical
  1007. conditions from the theorems that proved that singularities must occur. The final result was a joint paper by
  1008. Penrose and myself in 1970, which at last proved that there must have been a big bang singularity provided
  1009. only that general relativity is correct and the universe contains as much matter as we observe. There was a lot
  1010. of opposition to our work, partly from the Russians because of their Marxist belief in scientific determinism, and
  1011. partly from people who felt that the whole idea of singularities was repugnant and spoiled the beauty of
  1012. Einstein’s theory. However, one cannot really argue with a mathematical theorem. So in the end our work
  1013. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  1014. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (8 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  1015. became generally accepted and nowadays nearly everyone assumes that the universe started with a big bang
  1016. singularity. It is perhaps ironic that, having changed my mind, I am now trying to convince other physicists that
  1017. there was in fact no singularity at the beginning of the universe – as we shall see later, it can disappear once
  1018. quantum effects are taken into account.
  1019. We have seen in this chapter how, in less than half a century, man’s view of the universe formed over millennia
  1020. has been transformed. Hubble’s discovery that the universe was expanding, and the realization of the
  1021. insignificance of our own planet in the vastness of the universe, were just the starting point. As experimental
  1022. and theoretical evidence mounted, it became more and more clear that the universe must have had a
  1023. beginning in time, until in 1970 this was finally proved by Penrose and myself, on the basis of Einstein’s general
  1024. theory of relativity. That proof showed that general relativity is only an incomplete theory: it cannot tell us how
  1025. the universe started off, because it predicts that all physical theories, including itself, break down at the
  1026. beginning of the universe. However, general relativity claims to be only a partial theory, so what the singularity
  1027. theorems really show is that there must have been a time in the very early universe when the universe was so
  1028. small that one could no longer ignore the small-scale effects of the other great partial theory of the twentieth
  1029. century, quantum mechanics. At the start of the 1970s, then, we were forced to turn our search for an
  1030. understanding of the universe from our theory of the extraordinarily vast to our theory of the extraordinarily tiny.
  1031. That theory, quantum mechanics, will be described next, before we turn to the efforts to combine the two partial
  1032. theories into a single quantum theory of gravity.
  1033. PREVIOUS NEXT
  1034. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 3
  1035. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/b.html (9 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:14:24 AM]
  1036. CHAPTER 4
  1037. THE UNCERTAINTY PRINCIPLE
  1038. The success of scientific theories, particularly Newton’s theory of gravity, led the French scientist the Marquis de Laplace
  1039. at the beginning of the nineteenth century to argue that the universe was completely deterministic. Laplace suggested
  1040. that there should be a set of scientific laws that would allow us to predict everything that would happen in the universe, if
  1041. only we knew the complete state of the universe at one time. For example, if we knew the positions and speeds of the
  1042. sun and the planets at one time, then we could use Newton’s laws to calculate the state of the Solar System at any other
  1043. time. Determinism seems fairly obvious in this case, but Laplace went further to assume that there were similar laws
  1044. governing everything else, including human behavior.
  1045. The doctrine of scientific determinism was strongly resisted by many people, who felt that it infringed God’s freedom to
  1046. intervene in the world, but it remained the standard assumption of science until the early years of this century. One of the
  1047. first indications that this belief would have to be abandoned came when calculations by the British scientists Lord
  1048. Rayleigh and Sir James Jeans suggested that a hot object, or body, such as a star, must radiate energy at an infinite
  1049. rate. According to the laws we believed at the time, a hot body ought to give off electromagnetic waves (such as radio
  1050. waves, visible light, or X rays) equally at all frequencies. For example, a hot body should radiate the same amount of
  1051. energy in waves with frequencies between one and two million million waves a second as in waves with frequencies
  1052. between two and three million million waves a second. Now since the number of waves a second is unlimited, this would
  1053. mean that the total energy radiated would be infinite.
  1054. In order to avoid this obviously ridiculous result, the German scientist Max Planck suggested in 1900 that light, X rays,
  1055. and other waves could not be emitted at an arbitrary rate, but only in certain packets that he called quanta. Moreover,
  1056. each quantum had a certain amount of energy that was greater the higher the frequency of the waves, so at a high
  1057. enough frequency the emission of a single quantum would require more energy than was available. Thus the radiation at
  1058. high frequencies would be reduced, and so the rate at which the body lost energy would be finite.
  1059. The quantum hypothesis explained the observed rate of emission of radiation from hot bodies very well, but its
  1060. implications for determinism were not realized until 1926, when another German scientist, Werner Heisenberg,
  1061. formulated his famous uncertainty principle. In order to predict the future position and velocity of a particle, one has to be
  1062. able to measure its present position and velocity accurately. The obvious way to do this is to shine light on the particle.
  1063. Some of the waves of light will be scattered by the particle and this will indicate its position. However, one will not be able
  1064. to determine the position of the particle more accurately than the distance between the wave crests of light, so one needs
  1065. to use light of a short wavelength in order to measure the position of the particle precisely. Now, by Planck’s quantum
  1066. hypothesis, one cannot use an arbitrarily small amount of light; one has to use at least one quantum. This quantum will
  1067. disturb the particle and change its velocity in a way that cannot be predicted. moreover, the more accurately one
  1068. measures the position, the shorter the wavelength of the light that one needs and hence the higher the energy of a single
  1069. quantum. So the velocity of the particle will be disturbed by a larger amount. In other words, the more accurately you try
  1070. to measure the position of the particle, the less accurately you can measure its speed, and vice versa. Heisenberg
  1071. showed that the uncertainty in the position of the particle times the uncertainty in its velocity times the mass of the
  1072. particle can never be smaller than a certain quantity, which is known as Planck’s constant. Moreover, this limit does not
  1073. depend on the way in which one tries to measure the position or velocity of the particle, or on the type of particle:
  1074. Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle is a fundamental, inescapable property of the world.
  1075. The uncertainty principle had profound implications for the way in which we view the world. Even after more than seventy
  1076. years they have not been fully appreciated by many philosophers, and are still the subject of much controversy. The
  1077. uncertainty principle signaled an end to Laplace’s dream of a theory of science, a model of the universe that would be
  1078. completely deterministic: one certainly cannot predict future events exactly if one cannot even measure the present state
  1079. of the universe precisely! We could still imagine that there is a set of laws that determine events completely for some
  1080. supernatural being, who could observe the present state of the universe without disturbing it. However, such models of
  1081. the universe are not of much interest to us ordinary mortals. It seems better to employ the principle of economy known as
  1082. Occam’s razor and cut out all the features of the theory that cannot be observed. This approach led Heisenberg, Erwin
  1083. Schrodinger, and Paul Dirac in the 1920s to reformulate mechanics into a new theory called quantum mechanics, based
  1084. on the uncertainty principle. In this theory particles no longer had separate, well-defined positions and velocities that
  1085. could not be observed, Instead, they had a quantum state, which was a combination of position and velocity.
  1086. In general, quantum mechanics does not predict a single definite result for an observation. Instead, it predicts a number
  1087. of different possible outcomes and tells us how likely each of these is. That is to say, if one made the same measurement
  1088. on a large number of similar systems, each of which started off in the same way, one would find that the result of the
  1089. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 4
  1090. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/c.html (1 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:14:40 AM]
  1091. measurement would be A in a certain number of cases, B in a different number, and so on. One could predict the
  1092. approximate number of times that the result would be A or B, but one could not predict the specific result of an individual
  1093. measurement. Quantum mechanics therefore introduces an unavoidable element of unpredictability or randomness into
  1094. science. Einstein objected to this very strongly, despite the important role he had played in the development of these
  1095. ideas. Einstein was awarded the Nobel Prize for his contribution to quantum theory. Nevertheless, Einstein never
  1096. accepted that the universe was governed by chance; his feelings were summed up in his famous statement “God does
  1097. not play dice.” Most other scientists, however, were willing to accept quantum mechanics because it agreed perfectly with
  1098. experiment. Indeed, it has been an outstandingly successful theory and underlies nearly all of modern science and
  1099. technology. It governs the behavior of transistors and integrated circuits, which are the essential components of
  1100. electronic devices such as televisions and computers, and is also the basis of modern chemistry and biology. The only
  1101. areas of physical science into which quantum mechanics has not yet been properly incorporated are gravity and the
  1102. large-scale structure of the universe.
  1103. Although light is made up of waves, Planck’s quantum hypothesis tells us that in some ways it behaves as if it were
  1104. composed of particles: it can be emitted or absorbed only in packets, or quanta. Equally, Heisenberg’s uncertainty
  1105. principle implies that particles behave in some respects like waves: they do not have a definite position but are “smeared
  1106. out” with a certain probability distribution. The theory of quantum mechanics is based on an entirely new type of
  1107. mathematics that no longer describes the real world in terms of particles and waves; it is only the observations of the
  1108. world that may be described in those terms. There is thus a duality between waves and particles in quantum mechanics:
  1109. for some purposes it is helpful to think of particles as waves and for other purposes it is better to think of waves as
  1110. particles. An important consequence of this is that one can observe what is called interference between two sets of
  1111. waves or particles. That is to say, the crests of one set of waves may coincide with the troughs of the other set. The two
  1112. sets of waves then cancel each other out rather than adding up to a stronger wave as one might expect Figure 4:1.
  1113. Figure 4:1
  1114. A familiar example of interference in the case of light is the colors that are often seen in soap bubbles. These are caused
  1115. by reflection of light from the two sides of the thin film of water forming the bubble. White light consists of light waves of
  1116. all different wavelengths, or colors, For certain wavelengths the crests of the waves reflected from one side of the soap
  1117. film coincide with the troughs reflected from the other side. The colors corresponding to these wavelengths are absent
  1118. from the reflected light, which therefore appears to be colored. Interference can also occur for particles, because of the
  1119. duality introduced by quantum mechanics. A famous example is the so-called two-slit experiment Figure 4:2.
  1120. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 4
  1121. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/c.html (2 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:14:40 AM]
  1122. Figure 4:2
  1123. Consider a partition with two narrow parallel slits in it. On one side of the partition one places a source of fight of a
  1124. particular color (that is, of a particular wavelength). Most of the light will hit the partition, but a small amount will go
  1125. through the slits. Now suppose one places a screen on the far side of the partition from the light. Any point on the screen
  1126. will receive waves from the two slits. However, in general, the distance the light has to travel from the source to the
  1127. screen via the two slits will be different. This will mean that the waves from the slits will not be in phase with each other
  1128. when they arrive at the screen: in some places the waves will cancel each other out, and in others they will reinforce
  1129. each other. The result is a characteristic pattern of light and dark fringes.
  1130. The remarkable thing is that one gets exactly the same kind of fringes if one replaces the source of light by a source of
  1131. particles such as electrons with a definite speed (this means that the corresponding waves have a definite length). It
  1132. seems the more peculiar because if one only has one slit, one does not get any fringes, just a uniform distribution of
  1133. electrons across the screen. One might therefore think that opening another slit would just increase the number of
  1134. electrons hitting each point of the screen, but, because of interference, it actually decreases it in some places. If
  1135. electrons are sent through the slits one at a time, one would expect each to pass through one slit or the other, and so
  1136. behave just as if the slit it passed through were the only one there – giving a uniform distribution on the screen. In reality,
  1137. however, even when the electrons are sent one at a time, the fringes still appear. Each electron, therefore, must be
  1138. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 4
  1139. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/c.html (3 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:14:40 AM]
  1140. passing through both slits at the same time!
  1141. The phenomenon of interference between particles has been crucial to our understanding of the structure of atoms, the
  1142. basic units of chemistry and biology and the building blocks out of which we, and everything around us, are made. At the
  1143. beginning of this century it was thought that atoms were rather like the planets orbiting the sun, with electrons (particles
  1144. of negative electricity) orbiting around a central nucleus, which carried positive electricity. The attraction between the
  1145. positive and negative electricity was supposed to keep the electrons in their orbits in the same way that the gravitational
  1146. attraction between the sun and the planets keeps the planets in their orbits. The trouble with this was that the laws of
  1147. mechanics and electricity, before quantum mechanics, predicted that the electrons would lose energy and so spiral
  1148. inward until they collided with the nucleus. This would mean that the atom, and indeed all matter, should rapidly collapse
  1149. to a state of very high density. A partial solution to this problem was found by the Danish scientist Niels Bohr in 1913. He
  1150. suggested that maybe the electrons were not able to orbit at just any distance from the central nucleus but only at certain
  1151. specified distances. If one also supposed that only one or two electrons could orbit at any one of these distances, this
  1152. would solve the problem of the collapse of the atom, because the electrons could not spiral in any farther than to fill up
  1153. the orbits with e least distances and energies.
  1154. This model explained quite well the structure of the simplest atom, hydrogen, which has only one electron orbiting around
  1155. the nucleus. But it was not clear how one ought to extend it to more complicated atoms. Moreover, the idea of a limited
  1156. set of allowed orbits seemed very arbitrary. The new theory of quantum mechanics resolved this difficulty. It revealed that
  1157. an electron orbiting around the nucleus could be thought of as a wave, with a wavelength that depended on its velocity.
  1158. For certain orbits, the length of the orbit would correspond to a whole number (as opposed to a fractional number) of
  1159. wavelengths of the electron. For these orbits the wave crest would be in the same position each time round, so the
  1160. waves would add up: these orbits would correspond to Bohr’s allowed orbits. However, for orbits whose lengths were not
  1161. a whole number of wavelengths, each wave crest would eventually be canceled out by a trough as the electrons went
  1162. round; these orbits would not be allowed.
  1163. A nice way of visualizing the wave/particle duality is the so-called sum over histories introduced by the American scientist
  1164. Richard Feynman. In this approach the particle is not supposed to have a single history or path in space-time, as it would
  1165. in a classical, nonquantum theory. Instead it is supposed to go from A to B by every possible path. With each path there
  1166. are associated a couple of numbers: one represents the size of a wave and the other represents the position in the cycle
  1167. (i.e., whether it is at a crest or a trough). The probability of going from A to B is found by adding up the waves for all the
  1168. paths. In general, if one compares a set of neighboring paths, the phases or positions in the cycle will differ greatly. This
  1169. means that the waves associated with these paths will almost exactly cancel each other out. However, for some sets of
  1170. neighboring paths the phase will not vary much between paths. The waves for these paths will not cancel out Such paths
  1171. correspond to Bohr’s allowed orbits.
  1172. With these ideas, in concrete mathematical form, it was relatively straightforward to calculate the allowed orbits in more
  1173. complicated atoms and even in molecules, which are made up of a number of atoms held together by electrons in orbits
  1174. that go round more than one nucleus. Since the structure of molecules and their reactions with each other underlie all of
  1175. chemistry and biology, quantum mechanics allows us in principle to predict nearly everything we see around us, within
  1176. the limits set by the uncertainty principle. (In practice, however, the calculations required for systems containing more
  1177. than a few electrons are so complicated that we cannot do them.)
  1178. Einstein’s general theory of relativity seems to govern the large-scale structure of the universe. It is what is called a
  1179. classical theory; that is, it does not take account of the uncertainty principle of quantum mechanics, as it should for
  1180. consistency with other theories. The reason that this does not lead to any discrepancy with observation is that all the
  1181. gravitational fields that we normally experience are very weak. How-ever, the singularity theorems discussed earlier
  1182. indicate that the gravitational field should get very strong in at least two situations, black holes and the big bang. In such
  1183. strong fields the effects of quantum mechanics should be important. Thus, in a sense, classical general relativity, by
  1184. predicting points of infinite density, predicts its own downfall, just as classical (that is, nonquantum) mechanics predicted
  1185. its downfall by suggesting that atoms should collapse to infinite density. We do not yet have a complete consistent theory
  1186. that unifies general relativity and quantum mechanics, but we do know a number of the features it should have. The
  1187. consequences that these would have for black holes and the big bang will be described in later chapters. For the
  1188. moment, however, we shall turn to the recent attempts to bring together our understanding of the other forces of nature
  1189. into a single, unified quantum theory.
  1190. PREVIOUS NEXT
  1191. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 4
  1192. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/c.html (4 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:14:40 AM]
  1193. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 4
  1194. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/c.html (5 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:14:40 AM]
  1195. CHAPTER 5
  1196. ELEMENTARY PARTICLES AND THE FORCES OF NATURE
  1197. Aristotle believed that all the matter in the universe was made up of four basic elements – earth, air, fire, and water.
  1198. These elements were acted on by two forces: gravity, the tendency for earth and water to sink, and levity, the tendency
  1199. for air and fire to rise. This division of the contents of the universe into matter and forces is still used today. Aristotle
  1200. believed that matter was continuous, that is, one could divide a piece of matter into smaller and smaller bits without any
  1201. limit: one never came up against a grain of matter that could not be divided further. A few Greeks, however, such as
  1202. Democritus, held that matter was inherently grainy and that everything was made up of large numbers of various different
  1203. kinds of atoms. (The word atom means “indivisible” in Greek.) For centuries the argument continued without any real
  1204. evidence on either side, but in 1803 the British chemist and physicist John Dalton pointed out that the fact that chemical
  1205. compounds always combined in certain proportions could be explained by the grouping together of atoms to form units
  1206. called molecules. However, the argument between the two schools of thought was not finally settled in favor of the
  1207. atomists until the early years of this century. One of the important pieces of physical evidence was provided by Einstein.
  1208. In a paper written in 1905, a few weeks before the famous paper on special relativity, Einstein pointed out that what was
  1209. called Brownian motion – the irregular, random motion of small particles of dust suspended in a liquid – could be
  1210. explained as the effect of atoms of the liquid colliding with the dust particles.
  1211. By this time there were already suspicions that these atoms were not, after all, indivisible. Several years previously a
  1212. fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, J. J. Thomson, had demonstrated the existence of a particle of matter, called the
  1213. electron, that had a mass less than one thousandth of that of the lightest atom. He used a setup rather like a modern TV
  1214. picture tube: a red-hot metal filament gave off the electrons, and because these have a negative electric charge, an
  1215. electric field could be used to accelerate them toward a phosphor-coated screen. When they hit the screen, flashes of
  1216. light were generated. Soon it was realized that these electrons must be coming from within the atoms themselves, and in
  1217. 1911 the New Zealand physicist Ernest Rutherford finally showed that the atoms of matter do have internal structure:
  1218. they are made up of an extremely tiny, positively charged nucleus, around which a number of electrons orbit. He deduced
  1219. this by analyzing the way in which alpha-particles, which are positively charged particles given off by radioactive atoms,
  1220. are deflected when they collide with atoms.
  1221. At first it was thought that the nucleus of the atom was made up of electrons and different numbers of a positively
  1222. charged particle called the proton, from the Greek word meaning “first,” because it was believed to be the fundamental
  1223. unit from which matter was made. However, in 1932 a colleague of Rutherford’s at Cambridge, James Chadwick,
  1224. discovered that the nucleus contained another particle, called the neutron, which had almost the same mass as a proton
  1225. but no electrical charge. Chadwick received the Nobel Prize for his discovery, and was elected Master of Gonville and
  1226. Caius College, Cambridge (the college of which I am now a fellow). He later resigned as Master because of
  1227. disagreements with the Fellows. There had been a bitter dispute in the college ever since a group of young Fellows
  1228. returning after the war had voted many of the old Fellows out of the college offices they had held for a long time. This
  1229. was before my time; I joined the college in 1965 at the tail end of the bitterness, when similar disagreements forced
  1230. another Nobel Prize – winning Master, Sir Nevill Mott, to resign.
  1231. Up to about thirty years ago, it was thought that protons and neutrons were “elementary” particles, but experiments in
  1232. which protons were collided with other protons or electrons at high speeds indicated that they were in fact made up of
  1233. smaller particles. These particles were named quarks by the Caltech physicist Murray Gell-Mann, who won the Nobel
  1234. Prize in 1969 for his work on them. The origin of the name is an enigmatic quotation from James Joyce: “Three quarks for
  1235. Muster Mark!” The word quark is supposed to be pronounced like quart, but with a k at the end instead of a t, but is
  1236. usually pronounced to rhyme with lark.
  1237. There are a number of different varieties of quarks: there are six “flavors,” which we call up, down, strange, charmed,
  1238. bottom, and top. The first three flavors had been known since the 1960s but the charmed quark was discovered only in
  1239. 1974, the bottom in 1977, and the top in 1995. Each flavor comes in three “colors,” red, green, and blue. (It should be
  1240. emphasized that these terms are just labels: quarks are much smaller than the wavelength of visible light and so do not
  1241. have any color in the normal sense. It is just that modern physicists seem to have more imaginative ways of naming new
  1242. particles and phenomena – they no longer restrict themselves to Greek!) A proton or neutron is made up of three quarks,
  1243. one of each color. A proton contains two up quarks and one down quark; a neutron contains two down and one up. We
  1244. can create particles made up of the other quarks (strange, charmed, bottom, and top), but these all have a much greater
  1245. mass and decay very rapidly into protons and neutrons.
  1246. We now know that neither the atoms nor the protons and neutrons within them are indivisible. So the question is: what
  1247. are the truly elementary particles, the basic building blocks from which everything is made? Since the wavelength of light
  1248. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1249. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (1 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1250. is much larger than the size of an atom, we cannot hope to “look” at the parts of an atom in the ordinary way. We need to
  1251. use something with a much smaller wave-length. As we saw in the last chapter, quantum mechanics tells us that all
  1252. particles are in fact waves, and that the higher the energy of a particle, the smaller the wavelength of the corresponding
  1253. wave. So the best answer we can give to our question depends on how high a particle energy we have at our disposal,
  1254. because this determines on how small a length scale we can look. These particle energies are usually measured in units
  1255. called electron volts. (In Thomson’s experiments with electrons, we saw that he used an electric field to accelerate the
  1256. electrons. The energy that an electron gains from an electric field of one volt is what is known as an electron volt.) In the
  1257. nineteenth century, when the only particle energies that people knew how to use were the low energies of a few electron
  1258. volts generated by chemical reactions such as burning, it was thought that atoms were the smallest unit. In Rutherford’s
  1259. experiment, the alpha-particles had energies of millions of electron volts. More recently, we have learned how to use
  1260. electromagnetic fields to give particles energies of at first millions and then thousands of millions of electron volts. And so
  1261. we know that particles that were thought to be “elementary” thirty years ago are, in fact, made up of smaller particles.
  1262. May these, as we go to still higher energies, in turn be found to be made from still smaller particles? This is certainly
  1263. possible, but we do have some theoretical reasons for believing that we have, or are very near to, a knowledge of the
  1264. ultimate building blocks of nature.
  1265. Using the wave/particle duality discussed in the last chapter, every-thing in the universe, including light and gravity, can
  1266. be described in terms of particles. These particles have a property called spin. One way of thinking of spin is to imagine
  1267. the particles as little tops spinning about an axis. However, this can be misleading, because quantum mechanics tells us
  1268. that the particles do not have any well-defined axis. What the spin of a particle really tells us is what the particle looks like
  1269. from different directions. A particle of spin 0 is like a dot: it looks the same from every direction Figure 5:1-i. On the other
  1270. hand, a particle of spin 1 is like an arrow: it looks different from different directions Figure 5:1-ii. Only if one turns it round
  1271. a complete revolution (360 degrees) does the particle look the same. A particle of spin 2 is like a double-headed arrow
  1272. Figure 5:1-iii: it looks the same if one turns it round half a revolution (180 degrees). Similarly, higher spin particles look
  1273. the same if one turns them through smaller fractions of a complete revolution. All this seems fairly straightforward, but the
  1274. remark-able fact is that there are particles that do not look the same if one turns them through just one revolution: you
  1275. have to turn them through two complete revolutions! Such particles are said to have spin ½.
  1276. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1277. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (2 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1278. Figure 5:1
  1279. All the known particles in the universe can be divided into two groups: particles of spin ½, which make up the matter in
  1280. the universe, and particles of spin 0, 1, and 2, which, as we shall see, give rise to forces between the matter particles.
  1281. The matter particles obey what is called Pauli’s exclusion principle. This was discovered in 1925 by an Austrian physicist,
  1282. Wolfgang Pauli – for which he received the Nobel Prize in 1945. He was the archetypal theoretical physicist: it was said
  1283. of him that even his presence in the same town would make experiments go wrong! Pauli’s exclusion principle says that
  1284. two similar particles can-not exist in the same state; that is, they cannot have both the same position and the same
  1285. velocity, within the limits given by the uncertainty principle. The exclusion principle is crucial because it explains why
  1286. matter particles do not collapse to a state of very high density under the influence of the forces produced by the particles
  1287. of spin 0, 1, and 2: if the matter particles have very nearly the same positions, they must have different velocities, which
  1288. means that they will not stay in the same position for long. If the world had been created without the exclusion principle,
  1289. quarks would not form separate, well-defined protons and neutrons. Nor would these, together with electrons, form
  1290. separate, well-defined atoms. They would all collapse to form a roughly uniform, dense “soup.”
  1291. A proper understanding of the electron and other spin-½ particles did not come until 1928, when a theory was proposed
  1292. by Paul Dirac, who later was elected to the Lucasian Professorship of Mathematics at Cambridge (the same
  1293. professorship that Newton had once held and that I now hold). Dirac’s theory was the first of its kind that was consistent
  1294. with both quantum mechanics and the special theory of relativity. It explained mathematically why the electron had
  1295. spin-½; that is, why it didn’t look the same if you turned it through only one complete revolution, but did if you turned it
  1296. through two revolutions. It also predicted that the electron should have a partner: an anti-electron, or positron. The
  1297. discovery of the positron in 1932 confirmed Dirac’s theory and led to his being awarded the Nobel Prize for physics in
  1298. 1933. We now know that every particle has an antiparticle, with which it can annihilate. (In the case of the force-carrying
  1299. particles, the antiparticles are the same as the particles themselves.) There could be whole antiworlds and antipeople
  1300. made out of antiparticles. However, if you meet your antiself, don’t shake hands! You would both vanish in a great flash
  1301. of light. The question of why there seem to be so many more particles than antiparticles around us is extremely
  1302. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1303. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (3 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1304. important, and I shall return to it later in the chapter.
  1305. In quantum mechanics, the forces or interactions between matter particles are all supposed to be carried by particles of
  1306. integer spin – 0, 1, or 2. What happens is that a matter particle, such as an electron or a quark, emits a force-carrying
  1307. particle. The recoil from this emission changes the velocity of the matter particle. The force-carrying particle then collides
  1308. with another matter particle and is absorbed. This collision changes the velocity of the second particle, just as if there had
  1309. been a force between the two matter particles. It is an important property of ' the force-carrying particles that they do not
  1310. obey the exclusion principle. This means that there is no limit to the number that can be exchanged, and so they can give
  1311. rise to a strong force. However, if the force-carrying particles have a high mass, it will be difficult to produce and
  1312. exchange them over a large distance. So the forces that they carry will have only a short range. On the other hand, if the
  1313. force-carrying particles have no mass of their own, the forces will be long range. The force-carrying particles exchanged
  1314. between matter particles are said to be virtual particles because, unlike “real” particles, they cannot be directly detected
  1315. by a particle detector. We know they exist, however, because they do have a measurable effect: they give rise to forces
  1316. between matter particles. Particles of spin 0, 1, or 2 do also exist in some circumstances as real particles, when they can
  1317. be directly detected. They then appear to us as what a classical physicist would call waves, such as waves of light or
  1318. gravitational waves. They may sometimes be emitted when matter particles interact with each other by exchanging virtual
  1319. force-carrying particles. (For example, the electric repulsive force between two electrons is due to the exchange of virtual
  1320. photons, which can never be directly detected; but if one electron moves past another, real photons may be given off,
  1321. which we detect as light waves.)
  1322. Force-carrying particles can be grouped into four categories according to the strength of the force that they carry and the
  1323. particles with which they interact. It should be emphasized that this division into four classes is man-made; it is
  1324. convenient for the construction of partial theories, but it may not correspond to anything deeper. Ultimately, most
  1325. physicists hope to find a unified theory that will explain all four forces as different aspects of a single force. Indeed, many
  1326. would say this is the prime goal of physics today. Recently, successful attempts have been made to unify three of the
  1327. four categories of force – and I shall describe these in this chapter. The question of the unification of the remaining
  1328. category, gravity, we shall leave till later.
  1329. The first category is the gravitational force. This force is universal, that is, every particle feels the force of gravity,
  1330. according to its mass or energy. Gravity is the weakest of the four forces by a long way; it is so weak that we would not
  1331. notice it at all were it not for two special properties that it has: it can act over large distances, and it is always attractive.
  1332. This means that the very weak gravitational forces between the individual particles in two large bodies, such as the earth
  1333. and the sun, can all add up to produce a significant force. The other three forces are either short range, or are sometimes
  1334. attractive and some-times repulsive, so they tend to cancel out. In the quantum mechanical way of looking at the
  1335. gravitational field, the force between two matter particles is pictured as being carried by a particle of spin 2 called the
  1336. graviton. This has no mass of its own, so the force that it carries is long range. The gravitational force between the sun
  1337. and the earth is ascribed to the exchange of gravitons between the particles that make up these two bodies. Although the
  1338. exchanged particles are virtual, they certainly do produce a measurable effect – they make the earth orbit the sun! Real
  1339. gravitons make up what classical physicists would call gravitational waves, which are very weak – and so difficult to
  1340. detect that they have not yet been observed.
  1341. The next category is the electromagnetic force, which interacts with electrically charged particles like electrons and
  1342. quarks, but not with uncharged particles such as gravitons. It is much stronger than the gravitational force: the
  1343. electromagnetic force between two electrons is about a million million million million million million million (1 with forty-two
  1344. zeros after it) times bigger than the gravitational force. However, there are two kinds of electric charge, positive and
  1345. negative. The force between two positive charges is repulsive, as is the force between two negative charges, but the
  1346. force is attractive between a positive and a negative charge. A large body, such as the earth or the sun, contains nearly
  1347. equal numbers of positive and negative charges. Thus the attractive and repulsive forces between the individual particles
  1348. nearly cancel each other out, and there is very little net electromagnetic force. However, on the small scales of atoms
  1349. and molecules, electromagnetic forces dominate. The electromagnetic attraction between negatively charged electrons
  1350. and positively charged protons in the nucleus causes the electrons to orbit the nucleus of the atom, just as gravitational
  1351. attraction causes the earth to orbit the sun. The electromagnetic attraction is pictured as being caused by the exchange
  1352. of large numbers of virtual massless particles of spin 1, called photons. Again, the photons that are exchanged are virtual
  1353. particles. However, when an electron changes from one allowed orbit to another one nearer to the nucleus, energy is
  1354. released and a real photon is emitted – which can be observed as visible light by the human eye, if it has the right
  1355. wave-length, or by a photon detector such as photographic film. Equally, if a real photon collides with an atom, it may
  1356. move an electron from an orbit nearer the nucleus to one farther away. This uses up the energy of the photon, so it is
  1357. absorbed.
  1358. The third category is called the weak nuclear force, which is responsible for radioactivity and which acts on all matter
  1359. particles of spin-½, but not on particles of spin 0, 1, or 2, such as photons and gravitons. The weak nuclear force was not
  1360. well understood until 1967, when Abdus Salam at Imperial College, London, and Steven Weinberg at Harvard both
  1361. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1362. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (4 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1363. proposed theories that unified this interaction with the electromagnetic force, just as Maxwell had unified electricity and
  1364. magnetism about a hundred years earlier. They suggested that in addition to the photon, there were three other spin-1
  1365. particles, known collectively as massive vector bosons, that carried the weak force. These were called W+ (pronounced
  1366. W plus), W- (pronounced W minus), and Zº (pronounced Z naught), and each had a mass of around 100 GeV (GeV
  1367. stands for gigaelectron-volt, or one thousand million electron volts). The Weinberg-Salam theory exhibits a property
  1368. known as spontaneous symmetry breaking. This means that what appear to be a number of completely different particles
  1369. at low energies are in fact found to be all the same type of particle, only in different states. At high energies all these
  1370. particles behave similarly. The effect is rather like the behavior of a roulette ball on a roulette wheel. At high energies
  1371. (when the wheel is spun quickly) the ball behaves in essentially only one way – it rolls round and round. But as the wheel
  1372. slows, the energy of the ball decreases, and eventually the ball drops into one of the thirty-seven slots in the wheel. In
  1373. other words, at low energies there are thirty-seven different states in which the ball can exist. If, for some reason, we
  1374. could only observe the ball at low energies, we would then think that there were thirty-seven different types of ball!
  1375. In the Weinberg-Salam theory, at energies much greater than 100 GeV, the three new particles and the photon would all
  1376. behave in a similar manner. But at the lower particle energies that occur in most normal situations, this symmetry
  1377. between the particles would be broken. WE, W, and Zº would acquire large masses, making the forces they carry have a
  1378. very short range. At the time that Salam and Weinberg proposed their theory, few people believed them, and particle
  1379. accelerators were not powerful enough to reach the energies of 100 GeV required to produce real W+, W-, or Zº particles.
  1380. However, over the next ten years or so, the other predictions of the theory at lower energies agreed so well with
  1381. experiment that, in 1979, Salam and Weinberg were awarded the Nobel Prize for physics, together with Sheldon
  1382. Glashow, also at Harvard, who had suggested similar unified theories of the electromagnetic and weak nuclear forces.
  1383. The Nobel committee was spared the embarrassment of having made a mistake by the discovery in 1983 at CERN
  1384. (European Centre for Nuclear Research) of the three massive partners of the photon, with the correct predicted masses
  1385. and other properties. Carlo Rubbia, who led the team of several hundred physicists that made the discovery, received the
  1386. Nobel Prize in 1984, along with Simon van der Meer, the CERNengineer who developed the antimatter storage system
  1387. employed. (It is very difficult to make a mark in experimental physics these days unless you are already at the top! )
  1388. The fourth category is the strong nuclear force, which holds the quarks together in the proton and neutron, and holds the
  1389. protons and neutrons together in the nucleus of an atom. It is believed that this force is carried by another spin-1 particle,
  1390. called the gluon, which interacts only with itself and with the quarks. The strong nuclear force has a curious property
  1391. called confinement: it always binds particles together into combinations that have no color. One cannot have a single
  1392. quark on its own because it would have a color (red, green, or blue). Instead, a red quark has to be joined to a green and
  1393. a blue quark by a “string” of gluons (red + green + blue = white). Such a triplet constitutes a proton or a neutron. Another
  1394. possibility is a pair consisting of a quark and an antiquark (red + antired, or green + antigreen, or blue + antiblue = white).
  1395. Such combinations make up the particles known as mesons, which are unstable because the quark and antiquark can
  1396. annihilate each other, producing electrons and other particles. Similarly, confinement prevents one having a single gluon
  1397. on its own, because gluons also have color. Instead, one has to have a collection of gluons whose colors add up to white.
  1398. Such a collection forms an unstable particle called a glueball.
  1399. The fact that confinement prevents one from observing an isolated quark or gluon might seem to make the whole notion
  1400. of quarks and gluons as particles somewhat metaphysical. However, there is another property of the strong nuclear
  1401. force, called asymptotic freedom, that makes the concept of quarks and gluons well defined. At normal energies, the
  1402. strong nuclear force is indeed strong, and it binds the quarks tightly together. However, experiments with large particle
  1403. accelerators indicate that at high energies the strong force becomes much weaker, and the quarks and gluons behave
  1404. almost like free particles.
  1405. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1406. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (5 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1407. Figure 5:2
  1408. Figure 5:2 shows a photograph of a collision between a high-energy proton and antiproton. The success of the unification
  1409. of the electromagnetic and weak nuclear forces led to a number of attempts to combine these two forces with the strong
  1410. nuclear force into what is called a grand unified theory (or GUT). This title is rather an exaggeration: the resultant theories
  1411. are not all that grand, nor are they fully unified, as they do not include gravity. Nor are they really complete theories,
  1412. because they contain a number of parameters whose values cannot be predicted from the theory but have to be chosen
  1413. to fit in with experiment. Nevertheless, they may be a step toward a complete, fully unified theory. The basic idea of
  1414. GUTs is as follows: as was mentioned above, the strong nuclear force gets weaker at high energies. On the other hand,
  1415. the electromagnetic and weak forces, which are not asymptotically free, get stronger at high energies. At some very high
  1416. energy, called the grand unification energy, these three forces would all have the same strength and so could just be
  1417. different aspects of a single force. The GUTs also predict that at this energy the different spin-½ matter particles, like
  1418. quarks and electrons, would also all be essentially the same, thus achieving another unification.
  1419. The value of the grand unification energy is not very well known, but it would probably have to be at least a thousand
  1420. million million GeV. The present generation of particle accelerators can collide particles at energies of about one hundred
  1421. GeV, and machines are planned that would raise this to a few thousand GeV. But a machine that was powerful enough to
  1422. accelerate particles to the grand unification energy would have to be as big as the Solar System – and would be unlikely
  1423. to be funded in the present economic climate. Thus it is impossible to test grand unified theories directly in the laboratory.
  1424. However, just as in the case of the electromagnetic and weak unified theory, there are low-energy consequences of the
  1425. theory that can be tested.
  1426. The most interesting of these is the prediction that protons, which make up much of the mass of ordinary matter, can
  1427. spontaneously decay into lighter particles such as antielectrons. The reason this is possible is that at the grand
  1428. unification energy there is no essential difference between a quark and an antielectron. The three quarks inside a proton
  1429. normally do not have enough energy to change into antielectrons, but very occasionally one of them may acquire
  1430. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1431. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (6 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1432. sufficient energy to make the transition because the uncertainty principle means that the energy of the quarks inside the
  1433. proton cannot be fixed exactly. The proton would then decay. The probability of a quark gaining sufficient energy is so
  1434. low that one is likely to have to wait at least a million million million million million years (1 followed by thirty zeros). This is
  1435. much longer than the time since the big bang, which is a mere ten thousand million years or so (1 followed by ten zeros).
  1436. Thus one might think that the possibility of spontaneous proton decay could not be tested experimentally. However, one
  1437. can increase one’s chances of detecting a decay by observing a large amount of matter containing a very large number
  1438. of protons. (If, for example, one observed a number of protons equal to 1 followed by thirty-one zeros for a period of one
  1439. year, one would expect, according to the simplest GUT, to observe more than one proton decay.)
  1440. A number of such experiments have been carried out, but none have yielded definite evidence of proton or neutron
  1441. decay. One experiment used eight thousand tons of water and was performed in the Morton Salt Mine in Ohio (to avoid
  1442. other events taking place, caused by cosmic rays, that might be confused with proton decay). Since no spontaneous
  1443. proton decay had been observed during the experiment, one can calculate that the probable life of the proton must be
  1444. greater than ten million million million million million years (1 with thirty-one zeros). This is longer than the lifetime
  1445. predicted by the simplest grand unified theory, but there are more elaborate theories in which the predicted lifetimes are
  1446. longer. Still more sensitive experiments involving even larger quantities of matter will be needed to test them.
  1447. Even though it is very difficult to observe spontaneous proton decay, it may be that our very existence is a consequence
  1448. of the reverse process, the production of protons, or more simply, of quarks, from an initial situation in which there were
  1449. no more quarks than antiquarks, which is the most natural way to imagine the universe starting out. Matter on the earth is
  1450. made up mainly of protons and neutrons, which in turn are made up of quarks. There are no antiprotons or antineutrons,
  1451. made up from antiquarks, except for a few that physicists produce in large particle accelerators. We have evidence from
  1452. cosmic rays that the same is true for all the matter in our galaxy: there are no antiprotons or antineutrons apart from a
  1453. small number that are produced as particle/ antiparticle pairs in high-energy collisions. If there were large regions of
  1454. antimatter in our galaxy, we would expect to observe large quantities of radiation from the borders between the regions of
  1455. matter and antimatter, where many particles would be colliding with their anti-particles, annihilating each other and giving
  1456. off high-energy radiation.
  1457. We have no direct evidence as to whether the matter in other galaxies is made up of protons and neutrons or antiprotons
  1458. and anti-neutrons, but it must be one or the other: there cannot be a mixture in a single galaxy because in that case we
  1459. would again observe a lot of radiation from annihilations. We therefore believe that all galaxies are composed of quarks
  1460. rather than antiquarks; it seems implausible that some galaxies should be matter and some antimatter.
  1461. Why should there be so many more quarks than antiquarks? Why are there not equal numbers of each? It is certainly
  1462. fortunate for us that the numbers are unequal because, if they had been the same, nearly all the quarks and antiquarks
  1463. would have annihilated each other in the early universe and left a universe filled with radiation but hardly any matter.
  1464. There would then have been no galaxies, stars, or planets on which human life could have developed. Luckily, grand
  1465. unified theories may provide an explanation of why the universe should now contain more quarks than antiquarks, even if
  1466. it started out with equal numbers of each. As we have seen, GUTs allow quarks to change into antielectrons at high
  1467. energy. They also allow the reverse processes, antiquarks turning into electrons, and electrons and antielectrons turning
  1468. into antiquarks and quarks. There was a time in the very early universe when it was so hot that the particle energies
  1469. would have been high enough for these transformations to take place. But why should that lead to more quarks than
  1470. antiquarks? The reason is that the laws of physics are not quite the same for particles and antiparticles.
  1471. Up to 1956 it was believed that the laws of physics obeyed each of three separate symmetries called C, P, and T. The
  1472. symmetry C means that the laws are the same for particles and antiparticles. The symmetry P means that the laws are
  1473. the same for any situation and its mirror image (the mirror image of a particle spinning in a right-handed direction is one
  1474. spinning in a left-handed direction). The symmetry T means that if you reverse the direction of motion of all particles and
  1475. antiparticles, the system should go back to what it was at earlier times; in other words, the laws are the same in the
  1476. forward and backward directions of time. In 1956 two American physicists, Tsung-Dao Lee and Chen Ning Yang,
  1477. suggested that the weak force does not in fact obey the symmetry P. In other words, the weak force would make the
  1478. universe develop in a different way from the way in which the mirror image of the universe would develop. The same
  1479. year, a colleague, Chien-Shiung Wu, proved their prediction correct. She did this by lining up the nuclei of radioactive
  1480. atoms in a magnetic field, so that they were all spinning in the same direction, and showed that the electrons were given
  1481. off more in one direction than another. The following year, Lee and Yang received the Nobel Prize for their idea. It was
  1482. also found that the weak force did not obey the symmetry C. That is, it would cause a universe composed of antiparticles
  1483. to behave differently from our universe. Nevertheless, it seemed that the weak force did obey the combined symmetry
  1484. CP. That is, the universe would develop in the same way as its mirror image if, in addition, every particle was swapped
  1485. with its antiparticle! However, in 1964 two more Americans, J. W. Cronin and Val Fitch, discovered that even the CP
  1486. symmetry was not obeyed in the decay of certain particles called K-mesons. Cronin and Fitch eventually received the
  1487. Nobel Prize for their work in 1980. (A lot of prizes have been awarded for showing that the universe is not as simple as
  1488. we might have thought!)
  1489. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1490. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (7 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1491. There is a mathematical theorem that says that any theory that obeys quantum mechanics and relativity must always
  1492. obey the combined symmetry CPT. In other words, the universe would have to behave the same if one replaced particles
  1493. by antiparticles, took the mirror image, and also reversed the direction of time. But Cronin and Fitch showed that if one
  1494. replaces particles by antiparticles and takes the mirror image, but does not reverse the direction of time, then the
  1495. universe does not behave the same. The laws of physics, therefore, must change if one reverses the direction of time –
  1496. they do not obey the symmetry T.
  1497. Certainly the early universe does not obey the symmetry T: as time runs forward the universe expands – if it ran
  1498. backward, the universe would be contracting. And since there are forces that do not obey the symmetry T, it follows that
  1499. as the universe expands, these forces could cause more antielectrons to turn into quarks than electrons into antiquarks.
  1500. Then, as the universe expanded and cooled, the antiquarks would annihilate with the quarks, but since there would be
  1501. more quarks than antiquarks, a small excess of quarks would remain. It is these that make up the matter we see today
  1502. and out of which we ourselves are made. Thus our very existence could be regarded as a confirmation of grand unified
  1503. theories, though a qualitative one only; the uncertainties are such that one cannot predict the numbers of quarks that will
  1504. be left after the annihilation, or even whether it would be quarks or antiquarks that would remain. (Had it been an excess
  1505. of antiquarks, however, we would simply have named antiquarks quarks, and quarks antiquarks.)
  1506. Grand unified theories do not include the force of gravity. This does not matter too much, because gravity is such a weak
  1507. force that its effects can usually be neglected when we are dealing with elementary particles or atoms. However, the fact
  1508. that it is both long range and always attractive means that its effects all add up. So for a sufficiently large number of
  1509. matter particles, gravitational forces can dominate over all other forces. This is why it is gravity that determines the
  1510. evolution of the universe. Even for objects the size of stars, the attractive force of gravity can win over all the other forces
  1511. and cause the star to collapse. My work in the 1970s focused on the black holes that can result from such stellar collapse
  1512. and the intense gravitational fields around them. It was this that led to the first hints of how the theories of quantum
  1513. mechanics and general relativity might affect each other – a glimpse of the shape of a quantum theory of gravity yet to
  1514. come.
  1515. PREVIOUS NEXT
  1516. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 5
  1517. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/d.html (8 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:14:54 AM]
  1518. CHAPTER 6
  1519. BLACK HOLES
  1520. The term black hole is of very recent origin. It was coined in 1969 by the American scientist John Wheeler as a graphic
  1521. description of an idea that goes back at least two hundred years, to a time when there were two theories about light:
  1522. one, which Newton favored, was that it was composed of particles; the other was that it was made of waves. We now
  1523. know that really both theories are correct. By the wave/particle duality of quantum mechanics, light can be regarded as
  1524. both a wave and a particle. Under the theory that light is made up of waves, it was not clear how it would respond to
  1525. gravity. But if light is composed of particles, one might expect them to be affected by gravity in the same way that
  1526. cannonballs, rockets, and planets are. At first people thought that particles of light traveled infinitely fast, so gravity
  1527. would not have been able to slow them down, but the discovery by Roemer that light travels at a finite speed meant that
  1528. gravity might have an important effect.
  1529. On this assumption, a Cambridge don, John Michell, wrote a paper in 1783 in the Philosophical Transactions of the
  1530. Royal Society of London in which he pointed out that a star that was sufficiently massive and compact would have such
  1531. a strong gravitational field that light could not escape: any light emitted from the surface of the star would be dragged
  1532. back by the star’s gravitational attraction before it could get very far. Michell suggested that there might be a large
  1533. number of stars like this. Although we would not be able to see them because the light from them would not reach us,
  1534. we would still feel their gravitational attraction. Such objects are what we now call black holes, because that is what
  1535. they are: black voids in space. A similar suggestion was made a few years later by the French scientist the Marquis de
  1536. Laplace, apparently independently of Michell. Interestingly enough, Laplace included it in only the first and second
  1537. editions of his book The System of the World, and left it out of later editions; perhaps he decided that it was a crazy
  1538. idea. (Also, the particle theory of light went out of favor during the nineteenth century; it seemed that everything could
  1539. be explained by the wave theory, and according to the wave theory, it was not clear that light would be affected by
  1540. gravity at all.)
  1541. In fact, it is not really consistent to treat light like cannonballs in Newton’s theory of gravity because the speed of light is
  1542. fixed. (A cannonball fired upward from the earth will be slowed down by gravity and will eventually stop and fall back; a
  1543. photon, however, must continue upward at a constant speed. How then can Newtonian grav-ity affect light?) A
  1544. consistent theory of how gravity affects light did not come along until Einstein proposed general relativity in 1915. And
  1545. even then it was a long time before the implications of the theory for massive stars were understood.
  1546. To understand how a black hole might be formed, we first need an understanding of the life cycle of a star. A star is
  1547. formed when a large amount of gas (mostly hydrogen) starts to collapse in on itself due to its gravitational attraction. As
  1548. it contracts, the atoms of the gas collide with each other more and more frequently and at greater and greater speeds –
  1549. the gas heats up. Eventually, the gas will be so hot that when the hydrogen atoms collide they no longer bounce off
  1550. each other, but instead coalesce to form helium. The heat released in this reaction, which is like a controlled hydrogen
  1551. bomb explosion, is what makes the star shine. This additional heat also increases the pressure of the gas until it is
  1552. sufficient to balance the gravitational attraction, and the gas stops contracting. It is a bit like a balloon – there is a
  1553. balance between the pressure of the air inside, which is trying to make the balloon expand, and the tension in the
  1554. rubber, which is trying to make the balloon smaller. Stars will remain stable like this for a long time, with heat from the
  1555. nuclear reactions balancing the gravitational attraction. Eventually, however, the star will run out of its hydrogen and
  1556. other nuclear fuels. Paradoxically, the more fuel a star starts off with, the sooner it runs out. This is because the more
  1557. massive the star is, the hotter it needs to be to balance its gravitational attraction. And the hotter it is, the faster it will
  1558. use up its fuel. Our sun has probably got enough fuel for another five thousand million years or so, but more massive
  1559. stars can use up their fuel in as little as one hundred million years, much less than the age of the universe. When a star
  1560. runs out of fuel, it starts to cool off and so to contract. What might happen to it then was first understood only at the end
  1561. of the 1920s.
  1562. In 1928 an Indian graduate student, Subrahmanyan Chandrasekhar, set sail for England to study at Cambridge with the
  1563. British astronomer Sir Arthur Eddington, an expert on general relativity. (According to some accounts, a journalist told
  1564. Eddington in the early 1920s that he had heard there were only three people in the world who understood general
  1565. relativity. Eddington paused, then replied, “I am trying to think who the third person is.”) During his voyage from India,
  1566. Chandrasekhar worked out how big a star could be and still support itself against its own gravity after it had used up all
  1567. its fuel. The idea was this: when the star becomes small, the matter particles get very near each other, and so
  1568. according to the Pauli exclusion principle, they must have very different velocities. This makes them move away from
  1569. each other and so tends to make the star expand. A star can therefore maintain itself at a constant radius by a balance
  1570. between the attraction of gravity and the repulsion that arises from the exclusion principle, just as earlier in its life
  1571. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1572. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (1 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1573. gravity was balanced by the heat.
  1574. Chandrasekhar realized, however, that there is a limit to the repulsion that the exclusion principle can provide. The
  1575. theory of relativity limits the maximum difference in the velocities of the matter particles in the star to the speed of light.
  1576. This means that when the star got sufficiently dense, the repulsion caused by the exclusion principle would be less than
  1577. the attraction of gravity. Chandrasekhar calculated that a cold star of more than about one and a half times the mass of
  1578. the sun would not be able to support itself against its own gravity. (This mass is now known as the Chandrasekhar
  1579. limit.) A similar discovery was made about the same time by the Russian scientist Lev Davidovich Landau.
  1580. This had serious implications for the ultimate fate of massive stars. If a star’s mass is less than the Chandrasekhar limit,
  1581. it can eventually stop contracting and settle down to a possible final state as a “white dwarf” with a radius of a few
  1582. thousand miles and a density of hundreds of tons per cubic inch. A white dwarf is supported by the exclusion principle
  1583. repulsion between the electrons in its matter. We observe a large number of these white dwarf stars. One of the first to
  1584. be discovered is a star that is orbiting around Sirius, the brightest star in the night sky.
  1585. Landau pointed out that there was another possible final state for a star, also with a limiting mass of about one or two
  1586. times the mass of the sun but much smaller even than a white dwarf. These stars would be supported by the exclusion
  1587. principle repulsion between neutrons and protons, rather than between electrons. They were therefore called neutron
  1588. stars. They would have a radius of only ten miles or so and a density of hundreds of millions of tons per cubic inch. At
  1589. the time they were first predicted, there was no way that neutron stars could be observed. They were not actually
  1590. detected until much later.
  1591. Stars with masses above the Chandrasekhar limit, on the other hand, have a big problem when they come to the end of
  1592. their fuel. In some cases they may explode or manage to throw off enough matter to reduce their mass below the limit
  1593. and so avoid catastrophic gravitational collapse, but it was difficult to believe that this always happened, no matter how
  1594. big the star. How would it know that it had to lose weight? And even if every star managed to lose enough mass to
  1595. avoid collapse, what would happen if you added more mass to a white dwarf 'or neutron star to take it over the limit?
  1596. Would it collapse to infinite density? Eddington was shocked by that implication, and he refused to believe
  1597. Chandrasekhar’s result. Eddington thought it was simply not possible that a star could collapse to a point. This was the
  1598. view of most scientists: Einstein himself wrote a paper in which he claimed that stars would not shrink to zero size. The
  1599. hostility of other scientists, particularly Eddington, his former teacher and the leading authority on the structure of stars,
  1600. persuaded Chandrasekhar to abandon this line of work and turn instead to other problems in astronomy, such as the
  1601. motion of star clusters. However, when he was awarded the Nobel Prize in 1983, it was, at least in part, for his early
  1602. work on the limiting mass of cold stars.
  1603. Chandrasekhar had shown that the exclusion principle could not halt the collapse of a star more massive than the
  1604. Chandrasekhar limit, but the problem of understanding what would happen to such a star, according to general
  1605. relativity, was first solved by a young American, Robert Oppenheimer, in 1939. His result, however, suggested that
  1606. there would be no observational consequences that could be detected by the telescopes of the day. Then World War II
  1607. intervened and Oppenheimer himself became closely involved in the atom bomb project. After the war the problem of
  1608. gravitational collapse was largely forgotten as most scientists became caught up in what happens on the scale of the
  1609. atom and its nucleus. In the 1960s, however, interest in the large-scale problems of astronomy and cosmology was
  1610. revived by a great increase in the number and range of astronomical observations brought about by the application of
  1611. modern technology. Oppenheimer’s work was then rediscovered and extended by a number of people.
  1612. The picture that we now have from Oppenheimer’s work is as follows. The gravitational field of the star changes the
  1613. paths of light rays in space-time from what they would have been had the star not been present. The light cones, which
  1614. indicate the paths followed in space and time by flashes of light emitted from their tips, are bent slightly inward near the
  1615. surface of the star. This can be seen in the bending of light from distant stars observed during an eclipse of the sun. As
  1616. the star contracts, the gravitational field at its surface gets stronger and the light cones get bent inward more. This
  1617. makes it more difficult for light from the star to escape, and the light appears dimmer and redder to an observer at a
  1618. distance. Eventually, when the star has shrunk to a certain critical radius, the gravitational field at the surface becomes
  1619. so strong that the light cones are bent inward so much that light can no longer escape Figure 6:1.
  1620. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1621. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (2 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1622. Figure 6:1
  1623. According to the theory of relativity, nothing can travel faster than light. Thus if light cannot escape, neither can anything
  1624. else; everything is dragged back by the gravitational field. So one has a set of events, a region of space-time, from
  1625. which it is not possible to escape to reach a distant observer. This region is what we now call a black hole. Its boundary
  1626. is called the event horizon and it coincides with the paths of light rays that just fail to escape from the black hole.
  1627. In order to understand what you would see if you were watching a star collapse to form a black hole, one has to
  1628. remember that in the theory of relativity there is no absolute time. Each observer has his own measure of time. The time
  1629. for someone on a star will be different from that for someone at a distance, because of the gravitational field of the star.
  1630. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1631. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (3 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1632. Suppose an intrepid astronaut on the surface of the collapsing star, collapsing inward with it, sent a signal every
  1633. second, according to his watch, to his spaceship orbiting about the star. At some time on his watch, say 11:00, the star
  1634. would shrink below the critical radius at which the gravitational field becomes so strong nothing can escape, and his
  1635. signals would no longer reach the spaceship. As 11:00 approached his companions watching from the spaceship would
  1636. find the intervals between successive signals from the astronaut getting longer and longer, but this effect would be very
  1637. small before 10:59:59. They would have to wait only very slightly more than a second between the astronaut’s 10:59:58
  1638. signal and the one that he sent when his watch read 10:59:59, but they would have to wait forever for the 11:00 signal.
  1639. The light waves emitted from the surface of the star between 10:59:59 and 11:00, by the astronaut’s watch, would be
  1640. spread out over an infinite period of time, as seen from the spaceship. The time interval between the arrival of
  1641. successive waves at the spaceship would get longer and longer, so the light from the star would appear redder and
  1642. redder and fainter and fainter. Eventually, the star would be so dim that it could no longer be seen from the spaceship:
  1643. all that would be left would be a black hole in space. The star would, however, continue to exert the same gravitational
  1644. force on the spaceship, which would continue to orbit the black hole. This scenario is not entirely realistic, however,
  1645. because of the following problem. Gravity gets weaker the farther you are from the star, so the gravitational force on our
  1646. intrepid astronaut’s feet would always be greater than the force on his head. This difference in the forces would stretch
  1647. our astronaut out like spaghetti or tear him apart before the star had contracted to the critical radius at which the event
  1648. horizon formed! However, we believe that there are much larger objects in the universe, like the central regions of
  1649. galaxies, that can also undergo gravitational collapse to produce black holes; an astronaut on one of these would not be
  1650. torn apart before the black hole formed. He would not, in fact, feel anything special as he reached the critical radius,
  1651. and could pass the point of no return without noticing it However, within just a few hours, as the region continued to
  1652. collapse, the difference in the gravitational forces on his head and his feet would become so strong that again it would
  1653. tear him apart.
  1654. The work that Roger Penrose and I did between 1965 and 1970 showed that, according to general relativity, there must
  1655. be a singularity of infinite density and space-time curvature within a black hole. This is rather like the big bang at the
  1656. beginning of time, only it would be an end of time for the collapsing body and the astronaut. At this singularity the laws
  1657. of science and our ability to predict the future would break down. However, any observer who remained outside the
  1658. black hole would not be affected by this failure of predictability, because neither light nor any other signal could reach
  1659. him from the singularity. This remarkable fact led Roger Penrose to propose the cosmic censorship hypothesis, which
  1660. might be paraphrased as “God abhors a naked singularity.” In other words, the singularities produced by gravitational
  1661. collapse occur only in places, like black holes, where they are decently hidden from outside view by an event horizon.
  1662. Strictly, this is what is known as the weak cosmic censorship hypothesis: it protects observers who remain outside the
  1663. black hole from the consequences of the breakdown of predictability that occurs at the singularity, but it does nothing at
  1664. all for the poor unfortunate astronaut who falls into the hole.
  1665. There are some solutions of the equations of general relativity in which it is possible for our astronaut to see a naked
  1666. singularity: he may be able to avoid hitting the singularity and instead fall through a "wormhole” and come out in another
  1667. region of the universe. This would offer great possibilities for travel in space and time, but unfortunately it seems that
  1668. these solutions may all be highly unstable; the least disturbance, such as the presence of an astronaut, may change
  1669. them so that the astronaut could not see the singularity until he hit it and his time came to an end. In other words, the
  1670. singularity would always lie in his future and never in his past. The strong version of the cosmic censorship hypothesis
  1671. states that in a realistic solution, the singularities would always lie either entirely in the future (like the singularities of
  1672. gravitational collapse) or entirely in the past (like the , big bang). I strongly believe in cosmic censorship so I bet Kip
  1673. Thorne and John Preskill of Cal Tech that it would always hold. I lost the bet on a technicality because examples were
  1674. produced of solutions with a singularity that was visible from a long way away. So I had to pay up, which according to
  1675. the terms of the bet meant I had to clothe their nakedness. But I can claim a moral victory. The naked singularities were
  1676. unstable: the least disturbance would cause them either to disappear or to be hidden behind an event horizon. So they
  1677. would not occur in realistic situations.
  1678. The event horizon, the boundary of the region of space-time from which it is not possible to escape, acts rather like a
  1679. one-way membrane around the black hole: objects, such as unwary astronauts, can fall through the event horizon into
  1680. the black hole, but nothing can ever get out of the black hole through the event horizon. (Remember that the event
  1681. horizon is the path in space-time of light that is trying to escape from the black hole, and nothing can travel faster than
  1682. light.) One could well say of the event horizon what the poet Dante said of the entrance to Hell: “All hope abandon, ye
  1683. who enter here.” Anything or anyone who falls through the event horizon will soon reach the region of infinite density
  1684. and the end of time.
  1685. General relativity predicts that heavy objects that are moving will cause the emission of gravitational waves, ripples in
  1686. the curvature of space that travel at the speed of light. These are similar to light waves, which are ripples of the
  1687. electromagnetic field, but they are much harder to detect. They can be observed by the very slight change in separation
  1688. they produce between neighboring freely moving objects. A number of detectors are being built in the United States,
  1689. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1690. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (4 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1691. Europe, and Japan that will measure displacements of one part in a thousand million million million (1 with twenty-one
  1692. zeros after it), or less than the nucleus of an atom over a distance of ten miles.
  1693. Like light, gravitational waves carry energy away from the objects that emit them. One would therefore expect a system
  1694. of massive objects to settle down eventually to a stationary state, because the energy in any movement would be
  1695. carried away by the emission of gravitational waves. (It is rather like dropping a cork into water: at first it bobs up and
  1696. down a great deal, but as the ripples carry away its energy, it eventually settles down to a stationary state.) For
  1697. example, the movement of the earth in its orbit round the sun produces gravitational waves. The effect of the energy
  1698. loss will be to change the orbit of the earth so that gradually it gets nearer and nearer to the sun, eventually collides with
  1699. it, and settles down to a stationary state. The rate of energy loss in the case of the earth and the sun is very low – about
  1700. enough to run a small electric heater. This means it will take about a thousand million million million million years for the
  1701. earth to run into the sun, so there’s no immediate cause for worry! The change in the orbit of the earth is too slow to be
  1702. observed, but this same effect has been observed over the past few years occurring in the system called PSR 1913 +
  1703. 16 (PSR stands for “pulsar,” a special type of neutron star that emits regular pulses of radio waves). This system
  1704. contains two neutron stars orbiting each other, and the energy they are losing by the emission of gravitational waves is
  1705. causing them to spiral in toward each other. This confirmation of general relativity won J. H. Taylor and R. A. Hulse the
  1706. Nobel Prize in 1993. It will take about three hundred million . years for them to collide. Just before they do, they will be
  1707. orbiting so fast that they will emit enough gravitational waves for detectors like LIGO to pick up.
  1708. During the gravitational collapse of a star to form a black hole, the movements would be much more rapid, so the rate at
  1709. which energy is carried away would be much higher. It would therefore not be too long ' before it settled down to a
  1710. stationary state. What would this final stage look like? One might suppose that it would depend on all the complex
  1711. features of the star from which it had formed – not only its mass and rate of rotation, but also the different densities of
  1712. various parts of the star, and the complicated movements of the gases within the star. And if black holes were as varied
  1713. as the objects that collapsed to form them, it might be very difficult to make any predictions about black holes in
  1714. general.
  1715. In 1967, however, the study of black holes was revolutionized by Werner Israel, a Canadian scientist (who was born in
  1716. Berlin, brought up in South Africa, and took his doctoral degree in Ireland). Israel showed that, according to general
  1717. relativity, non-rotating black holes must be very simple; they were perfectly spherical, their size depended only on their
  1718. mass, and any two such black holes with the same mass were identical. They could, in fact, be described by a
  1719. particular solution of Einstein’s equations that had been known since 1917, found by Karl Schwarzschild shortly after
  1720. the discovery of general relativity. At first many people, including Israel himself, argued that since black holes had to be
  1721. perfectly spherical, a black hole could only form from the collapse of a perfectly spherical object. Any real star – which
  1722. would never be perfectly spherical – could therefore only collapse to form a naked singularity.
  1723. There was, however, a different interpretation of Israel’s result, which was advocated by Roger Penrose and John
  1724. Wheeler in particular. They argued that the rapid movements involved in a star’s collapse would mean that the
  1725. gravitational waves it gave off would make it ever more spherical, and by the time it had settled down to a stationary
  1726. state, it would be precisely spherical. According to this view, any non-rotating star, however complicated its shape and
  1727. internal structure, would end up after gravitational collapse as a perfectly spherical black hole, whose size would
  1728. depend only on its mass. Further calculations supported this view, and it soon came to be adopted generally.
  1729. Israel’s result dealt with the case of black holes formed from non-rotating bodies only. In 1963, Roy Kerr, a New
  1730. Zealander, found a set of solutions of the equations of general relativity that described rotating black holes. These
  1731. “Kerr” black holes rotate at a constant rate, their size and shape depending only on their mass and rate of rotation. If the
  1732. rotation is zero, the black hole is perfectly round and the solution is identical to the Schwarzschild solution. If the
  1733. rotation is non-zero, the black hole bulges outward near its equator (just as the earth or the sun bulge due to their
  1734. rotation), and the faster it rotates, the more it bulges. So, to extend Israel’s result to include rotating bodies, it was
  1735. conjectured that any rotating body that collapsed to form a black hole would eventually settle down to a stationary state
  1736. described by the Kerr solution. In 1970 a colleague and fellow research student of mine at Cambridge, Brandon Carter,
  1737. took the first step toward proving this conjecture. He showed that, provided a stationary rotating black hole had an axis
  1738. of symmetry, like a spinning top, its size and shape would depend only on its mass and rate of rotation. Then, in 1971, I
  1739. proved that any stationary rotating black hole would indeed have such an axis of symmetry. Finally, in 1973, David
  1740. Robinson at Kings College, London, used Carter’s and my results to show that the conjecture had been correct: such a
  1741. black hole had indeed to be the Kerr solution. So after gravitational collapse a black hole must settle down into a state
  1742. in which it could be rotating, but not pulsating. Moreover, its size and shape would depend only on its mass and rate of
  1743. rotation, and not on the nature of the body that had collapsed to form it. This result became known by the maxim: “A
  1744. black hole has no hair.” The “no hair” theorem is of great practical importance, because it so greatly restricts the
  1745. possible types of black holes. One can therefore make detailed models of objects that might contain black holes and
  1746. compare the predictions of the models with observations. It also means that a very large amount of information about
  1747. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1748. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (5 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1749. the body that has collapsed must be lost when a black hole is formed, because afterward all we can possibly measure
  1750. about the body is its mass and rate of rotation. The significance of this will be seen in the next chapter.
  1751. Black holes are one of only a fairly small number of cases in the history of science in which a theory was developed in
  1752. great detail as a mathematical model before there was any evidence from observations that it was correct. Indeed, this
  1753. used to be the main argument of opponents of black holes: how could one believe in objects for which the only
  1754. evidence was calculations based on the dubious theory of general relativity? In 1963, however, Maarten Schmidt, an
  1755. astronomer at the Palomar Observatory in California, measured the red shift of a faint starlike object in the direction of
  1756. the source of radio waves called 3C273 (that is, source number 273 in the third Cambridge catalogue of radio sources).
  1757. He found it was too large to be caused by a gravitational field: if it had been a gravitational red shift, the object would
  1758. have to be so massive and so near to us that it would disturb the orbits of planets in the Solar System. This suggested
  1759. that the red shift was instead caused by the expansion of the universe, which, in turn, meant that the object was a very
  1760. long distance away. And to be visible at such a great distance, the object must be very bright, must, in other words, be
  1761. emitting a huge amount of energy. The only mechanism that people could think of that would produce such large
  1762. quantities of energy seemed to be the gravitational collapse not just of a star but of a whole central region of a galaxy. A
  1763. number of other similar “quasi-stellar objects,” or quasars, have been discovered, all with large red shifts. But they are
  1764. all too far away and therefore too difficult to observe to provide conclusive evidence of black holes.
  1765. Further encouragement for the existence of black holes came in 1967 with the discovery by a research student at
  1766. Cambridge, Jocelyn Bell-Burnell, of objects in the sky that were emitting regular pulses of radio waves. At first Bell and
  1767. her supervisor, Antony Hewish, thought they might have made contact with an alien civilization in the galaxy! Indeed, at
  1768. the seminar at which they announced their discovery, I remember that they called the first four sources to be found
  1769. LGM 1 – 4, LGM standing for “Little Green Men.” In the end, however, they and everyone else came to the less
  1770. romantic conclusion that these objects, which were given the name pulsars, were in fact rotating neutron stars that were
  1771. emitting pulses of radio waves because of a complicated interaction between their magnetic fields and surrounding
  1772. matter. This was bad news for writers of space westerns, but very hopeful for the small number of us who believed in
  1773. black holes at that time: it was the first positive evidence that neutron stars existed. A neutron star has a radius of about
  1774. ten miles, only a few times the critical radius at which a star becomes a black hole. If a star could collapse to such a
  1775. small size, it is not unreasonable to expect that other stars could collapse to even smaller size and become black holes.
  1776. How could we hope to detect a black hole, as by its very definition it does not emit any light? It might seem a bit like
  1777. looking for a black cat in a coal cellar. Fortunately, there is a way. As John Michell pointed out in his pioneering paper in
  1778. 1783, a black hole still exerts a gravitational fierce on nearby objects. Astronomers have observed many systems in
  1779. which two stars orbit around each other, attracted toward each other by gravity. They also observe systems in which
  1780. there is only one visible star that is orbiting around some unseen companion. One cannot, of course, immediately
  1781. conclude that the companion is a black hole: it might merely be a star that is too faint to be seen. However, some of
  1782. these systems, like the one called Cygnus X-1 Figure 6:2, are also strong sources of X-rays.
  1783. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1784. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (6 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1785. Figure 6:2
  1786. The best explanation for this phenomenon is that matter has been blown off the surface of the visible star. As it falls
  1787. toward the unseen companion, it develops a spiral motion (rather like water running out of a bath), and it gets very hot,
  1788. emitting X-rays Figure 6:3.
  1789. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1790. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (7 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1791. Figure 6:3
  1792. For this mechanism to work, the unseen object has to be very small, like a white dwarf, neutron star, or black hole.
  1793. From the observed orbit of the visible star, one can determine the lowest possible mass of the unseen object. In the
  1794. case of Cygnus X-l, this is about six times the mass of the sun, which, according to Chandrasekhar’r result, is too great
  1795. for the unseen object to be a white dwarf. It is also too large a mass to be a neutron star. It seems, therefore, that it
  1796. must be a black hole.
  1797. There are other models to explain Cygnus X-1 that do not include a black hole, but they are all rather far-fetched. A
  1798. black hole seems to be the only really natural explanation of the observations. Despite this, I had a bet with Kip Thorne
  1799. of the California Institute of Technology that in fact Cygnus X-1 does not contain a black hole! This was a form f
  1800. insurance policy for me. I have done a lot of work on black holes, and it would all be wasted if it turned out that black
  1801. holes do not exist. But in that case, I would have the consolation of winning my bet, which would bring me four years of
  1802. the magazine Private Eye. In fact, although the situation with Cygnus X-1 has not changed much since we made the bet
  1803. in 1975, there is now so much other observational evidence in favor of black holes that I have conceded the bet. I paid
  1804. the specified penalty, which was a one-year subscription to Penthouse, to the outrage of Kip’s liberated wife.
  1805. We also now have evidence for several other black holes in systems like Cygnus X-1 in our galaxy and in two
  1806. neighboring galaxies called the Magellanic Clouds. The number of black holes, however, is almost certainly very much
  1807. higher; in the long history of the universe, many stars must have burned all their nuclear fuel and have had to collapse.
  1808. The number of black holes may well be greater even than the number of visible stars, which totals about a hundred
  1809. thousand million in our galaxy alone. The extra gravitational attraction of such a large number of black holes could
  1810. explain why our galaxy rotates at the rate it does: the mass of the visible stars is insufficient to account for this. We also
  1811. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1812. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (8 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1813. have some evidence that there is a much larger black hole, with a mass of about a hundred thousand times that of the
  1814. sun, at the center of our galaxy. Stars in the galaxy that come too near this black hole will be torn apart by the
  1815. difference in the gravitational forces on their near and far sides. Their remains and gas that is thrown off other stars, will
  1816. fall toward the black hole. As in the case of Cygnus X-l, the gas will spiral inward and will heat up, though not as much
  1817. as in that case. It will not get hot enough to emit X rays, but it could account for the very compact source of radio waves
  1818. and infrared rays that is observed at the galactic center.
  1819. It is thought that similar but even larger black holes, with masses of about a hundred million times the mass of the sun,
  1820. occur at the centers of quasars. For example, observations with the Hubble telescope of the galaxy known as M87
  1821. reveal that it contains a disk of gas 130 light-years across rotating about a central object two thousand million times the
  1822. mass of the sun. This can only be a black hole. Matter falling into such a supermassive black hole would provide the
  1823. only source of power great enough to explain the enormous amounts of energy that these objects are emitting. As the
  1824. matter spirals into the black hole, it would make the black hole rotate in the same direction, causing it to develop a
  1825. magnetic field rather like that of the earth. Very high-energy particles would be generated near the black hole by the
  1826. in-falling matter. The magnetic field would be so strong that it could focus these particles into jets ejected outward along
  1827. the axis of rotation of the black hole, that is, in the directions of its north and south poles. Such jets are indeed observed
  1828. in a number of galaxies and quasars. One can also consider the possibility that there might be black holes with masses
  1829. much less than that of the sun. Such black holes could not be formed by gravitational collapse, because their masses
  1830. are below the Chandrasekhar mass limit: stars of this low mass can support themselves against the force of gravity
  1831. even when they have exhausted their nuclear fuel. Low-mass black holes could form only if matter was compressed to
  1832. enormous densities by very large external pressures. Such conditions could occur in a very big hydrogen bomb: the
  1833. physicist John Wheeler once calculated that if one took all the heavy water in all the oceans of the world, one could
  1834. build a hydrogen bomb that would compress matter at the center so much that a black hole would be created. (Of
  1835. course, there would be no one left to observe it!) A more practical possibility is that such low-mass black holes might
  1836. have been formed in the high temperatures and pressures of the very early universe. Black holes would have been
  1837. formed only if the early universe had not been perfectly smooth and uniform, because only a small region that was
  1838. denser than average could be compressed in this way to form a black hole. But we know that there must have been
  1839. some irregularities, because otherwise the matter in the universe would still be perfectly uniformly distributed at the
  1840. present epoch, instead of being clumped together in stars and galaxies.
  1841. Whether the irregularities required to account for stars and galaxies would have led to the formation of a significant
  1842. number of “primordial” black holes clearly depends on the details of the conditions in the early universe. So if we could
  1843. determine how many primordial black holes there are now, we would learn a lot about the very early stages of the
  1844. universe. Primordial black holes with masses more than a thousand million tons (the mass of a large mountain) could
  1845. be detected only by their gravitational influence on other, visible matter or on the expansion of the universe. However,
  1846. as we shall learn in the next chapter, black holes are not really black after all: they glow like a hot body, and the smaller
  1847. they are, the more they glow. So, paradoxically, smaller black holes might actually turn out to be easier to detect than
  1848. large ones!
  1849. PREVIOUS NEXT
  1850. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 6
  1851. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/e.html (9 of 9) [2/20/2001 3:15:08 AM]
  1852. CHAPTER 7
  1853. BLACK HOLES AIN’T SO BLACK
  1854. Before 1970, my research on general relativity had concentrated mainly on the question of whether or not there had
  1855. been a big bang singularity. However, one evening in November that year, shortly after the birth of my daughter, Lucy,
  1856. I started to think about black holes as I was getting into bed. My disability makes this rather a slow process, so I had
  1857. plenty of time. At that date there was no precise definition of which points in space-time lay inside a black hole and
  1858. which lay outside. I had already discussed with Roger Penrose the idea of defining a black hole as the set of events
  1859. from which it was not possible to escape to a large distance, which is now the generally accepted definition. It means
  1860. that the boundary of the black hole, the event horizon, is formed by the light rays that just fail to escape from the black
  1861. hole, hovering forever just on the edge Figure 7:1. It is a bit like running away from the police and just managing to
  1862. keep one step ahead but not being able to get clear away!
  1863. Figure 7:1
  1864. Suddenly I realized that the paths of these light rays could never approach one another. If they did they must
  1865. eventually run into one another. It would be like meeting someone else running away from the police in the opposite
  1866. direction – you would both be caught! (Or, in this case, fall into a black hole.) But if these light rays were swallowed up
  1867. by the black hole, then they could not have been on the boundary of the black hole. So the paths of light rays in the
  1868. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  1869. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (1 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  1870. event horizon had always to be moving parallel to, or away from, each other. Another way of seeing this is that the
  1871. event horizon, the boundary of the black hole, is like the edge of a shadow – the shadow of impending doom. If you
  1872. look at the shadow cast by a source at a great distance, such as the sun, you will see that the rays of light in the edge
  1873. are not approaching each other.
  1874. If the rays of light that form the event horizon, the boundary of the black hole, can never approach each other, the area
  1875. of the event horizon might stay the same or increase with time, but it could never decrease because that would mean
  1876. that at least some of the rays of light in the boundary would have to be approaching each other. In fact, the area would
  1877. increase whenever matter or radiation fell into the black hole Figure 7:2.
  1878. Figures 7:2 & 7:3
  1879. Or if two black holes collided and merged together to form a single black hole, the area of the event horizon of the final
  1880. black hole would be greater than or equal to the sum of the areas of the event horizons of the original black holes
  1881. Figure 7:3. This nondecreasing property of the event horizon’s area placed an important restriction on the possible
  1882. behavior of black holes. I was so excited with my discovery that I did not get much sleep that night. The next day I rang
  1883. up Roger Penrose. He agreed with me. I think, in fact, that he had been aware of this property of the area. However,
  1884. he had been using a slightly different definition of a black hole. He had not realized that the boundaries of the black
  1885. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  1886. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (2 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  1887. hole according to the two definitions would be the same, and hence so would their areas, provided the black hole had
  1888. settled down to a state in which it was not changing with time.
  1889. The nondecreasing behavior of a black hole’s area was very reminiscent of the behavior of a physical quantity called
  1890. entropy, which measures the degree of disorder of a system. It is a matter of common experience that disorder will
  1891. tend to increase if things are left to themselves. (One has only to stop making repairs around the house to see that!)
  1892. One can create order out of disorder (for example, one can paint the house), but that requires expenditure of effort or
  1893. energy and so decreases the amount of ordered energy available.
  1894. A precise statement of this idea is known as the second law of thermodynamics. It states that the entropy of an isolated
  1895. system always increases, and that when two systems are joined together, the entropy of the combined system is
  1896. greater than the sum of the entropies of the individual systems. For example, consider a system of gas molecules in a
  1897. box. The molecules can be thought of as little billiard balls continually colliding with each other and bouncing off the
  1898. walls of the box. The higher the temperature of the gas, the faster the molecules move, and so the more frequently and
  1899. harder they collide with the walls of the box and the greater the outward pressure they exert on the walls. Suppose that
  1900. initially the molecules are all confined to the left-hand side of the box by a partition. If the partition is then removed, the
  1901. molecules will tend to spread out and occupy both halves of the box. At some later time they could, by chance, all be in
  1902. the right half or back in the left half, but it is overwhelmingly more probable that there will be roughly equal numbers in
  1903. the two halves. Such a state is less ordered, or more disordered, than the original state in which all the molecules were
  1904. in one half. One therefore says that the entropy of the gas has gone up. Similarly, suppose one starts with two boxes,
  1905. one containing oxygen molecules and the other containing nitrogen molecules. If one joins the boxes together and
  1906. removes the intervening wall, the oxygen and the nitrogen molecules will start to mix. At a later time the most probable
  1907. state would be a fairly uniform mixture of oxygen and nitrogen molecules throughout the two boxes. This state would
  1908. be less ordered, and hence have more entropy, than the initial state of two separate boxes.
  1909. The second law of thermodynamics has a rather different status than that of other laws of science, such as Newton's
  1910. law of gravity, for example, because it does not hold always, just in the vast majority of cases. The probability of all the
  1911. gas molecules in our first box
  1912. found in one half of the box at a later time is many millions of millions to one, but it can happen. However, if one has a
  1913. black hole around there seems to be a rather easier way of violating the second law: just throw some matter with a lot
  1914. of entropy such as a box of gas, down the black hole. The total entropy of matter outside the black hole would go
  1915. down. One could, of course, still say that the total entropy, including the entropy inside the black hole, has not gone
  1916. down - but since there is no way to look inside the black hole, we cannot see how much entropy the matter inside it
  1917. has. It would be nice, then, if there was some feature of the black hole by which observers outside the black hole could
  1918. tell its entropy, and which would increase whenever matter carrying entropy fell into the black hole. Following the
  1919. discovery, described above, that the area of the event horizon increased whenever matter fell into a black hole, a
  1920. research student at Princeton named Jacob Bekenstein suggested that the area of the event horizon was a measure of
  1921. the entropy of the black hole. As matter carrying entropy fell into a black hole, the area of its event horizon would go
  1922. up, so that the sum of the entropy of matter outside black holes and the area of the horizons would never go down.
  1923. This suggestion seemed to prevent the second law of thermodynamics from being violated in most situations.
  1924. However, there was one fatal flaw. If a black hole has entropy, then it ought to also have a temperature. But a body
  1925. with a particular temperature must emit radiation at a certain rate. It is a matter of common experience that if one heats
  1926. up a poker in a fire it glows red hot and emits radiation, but bodies at lower temperatures emit radiation too; one just
  1927. does not normally notice it because the amount is fairly small. This radiation is required in order to prevent violation of
  1928. the second law. So black holes ought to emit radiation. But by their very definition, black holes are objects that are not
  1929. supposed to emit anything. It therefore seemed that the area of the event horizon of a black hole could not be regarded
  1930. as its entropy. In 1972 I wrote a paper with Brandon Carter and an American colleague, Jim Bardeen, in which we
  1931. pointed out that although there were many similarities between entropy and the area of the event horizon, there was
  1932. this apparently fatal difficulty. I must admit that in writing this paper I was motivated partly by irritation with Bekenstein,
  1933. who, I felt, had misused my discovery of the increase of the area of the event horizon. However, it turned out in the end
  1934. that he was basically correct, though in a manner he had certainly not expected.
  1935. In September 1973, while I was visiting Moscow, I discussed black holes with two leading Soviet experts, Yakov
  1936. Zeldovich and Alexander Starobinsky. They convinced me that, according to the quantum mechanical uncertainty
  1937. principle, rotating black holes should create and emit particles. I believed their arguments on physical grounds, but I did
  1938. not like the mathematical way in which they calculated the emission. I therefore set about devising a better
  1939. mathematical treatment, which I described at an informal seminar in Oxford at the end of November 1973. At that time I
  1940. had not done the calculations to find out how much would actually be emitted. I was expecting to discover just the
  1941. radiation that Zeldovich and Starobinsky had predicted from rotating black holes. However, when I did the calculation, I
  1942. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  1943. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (3 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  1944. found, to my surprise and annoyance, that even non-rotating black holes should apparently create and emit particles at
  1945. a steady rate. At first I thought that this emission indicated that one of the approximations I had used was not valid. I
  1946. was afraid that if Bekenstein found out about it, he would use it as a further argument to support his ideas about the
  1947. entropy of black holes, which I still did not like. However, the more I thought about it, the more it seemed that the
  1948. approximations really ought to hold. But what finally convinced me that the emission was real was that the spectrum of
  1949. the emitted particles was exactly that which would be emitted by a hot body, and that the black hole was emitting
  1950. particles at exactly the correct rate to prevent violations of the second law. Since then the calculations have been
  1951. repeated in a number of different forms by other people. They all confirm that a black hole ought to emit particles and
  1952. radiation as if it were a hot body with a temperature that depends only on the black hole’s mass: the higher the mass,
  1953. the lower the temperature.
  1954. How is it possible that a black hole appears to emit particles when we know that nothing can escape from within its
  1955. event horizon? The answer, quantum theory tells us, is that the particles do not come from within the black hole, but
  1956. from the “empty” space just outside the black hole’s event horizon! We can understand this in the following way: what
  1957. we think of as “empty” space cannot be completely empty because that would mean that all the fields, such as the
  1958. gravitational and electromagnetic fields, would have to be exactly zero. However, the value of a field and its rate of
  1959. change with time are like the position and velocity of a particle: the uncertainty principle implies that the more
  1960. accurately one knows one of these quantities, the less accurately one can know the other. So in empty space the field
  1961. cannot be fixed at exactly zero, because then it would have both a precise value (zero) and a precise rate of change
  1962. (also zero). There must be a certain minimum amount of uncertainty, or quantum fluctuations, in the value of the field.
  1963. One can think of these fluctuations as pairs of particles of light or gravity that appear together at some time, move
  1964. apart, and then come together again and annihilate each other. These particles are virtual particles like the particles
  1965. that carry the gravitational force of the sun: unlike real particles, they cannot be observed directly with a particle
  1966. detector. However, their indirect effects, such as small changes in the energy of electron orbits in atoms, can be
  1967. measured and agree with the theoretical predictions to a remarkable degree of accuracy. The uncertainty principle also
  1968. predicts that there will be similar virtual pairs of matter particles, such as electrons or quarks. In this case, however,
  1969. one member of the pair will be a particle and the other an antiparticle (the antiparticles of light and gravity are the same
  1970. as the particles).
  1971. Because energy cannot be created out of nothing, one of the partners in a particle/antiparticle pair will have positive
  1972. energy, and the other partner negative energy. The one with negative energy is condemned to be a short-lived virtual
  1973. particle because real particles always have positive energy in normal situations. It must therefore seek out its partner
  1974. and annihilate with it. However, a real particle close to a massive body has less energy than if it were far away,
  1975. because it would take energy to lift it far away against the gravitational attraction of the body. Normally, the energy of
  1976. the particle is still positive, but the gravitational field inside a black hole is so strong that even a real particle can have
  1977. negative energy there. It is therefore possible, if a black hole is present, for the virtual particle with negative energy to
  1978. fall into the black hole and become a real particle or antiparticle. In this case it no longer has to annihilate with its
  1979. partner. Its forsaken partner may fall into the black hole as well. Or, having positive energy, it might also escape from
  1980. the vicinity of the black hole as a real particle or antiparticle Figure 7:4.
  1981. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  1982. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (4 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  1983. Figure 7:4
  1984. To an observer at a distance, it will appear to have been emitted from the black hole. The smaller the black hole, the
  1985. shorter the distance the particle with negative energy will have to go before it becomes a real particle, and thus the
  1986. greater the rate of emission, and the apparent temperature, of the black hole.
  1987. The positive energy of the outgoing radiation would be balanced by a flow of negative energy particles into the black
  1988. hole. By Einstein’s equation E = mc2 (where E is energy, m is mass, and c is the speed of light), energy is proportional
  1989. to mass. A flow of negative energy into the black hole therefore reduces its mass. As the black hole loses mass, the
  1990. area of its event horizon gets smaller, but this decrease in the entropy of the black hole is more than compensated for
  1991. by the entropy of the emitted radiation, so the second law is never violated.
  1992. Moreover, the lower the mass of the black hole, the higher its temperature. So as the black hole loses mass, its
  1993. temperature and rate of emission increase, so it loses mass more quickly. What happens when the mass of the black
  1994. hole eventually becomes extremely small is not quite clear, but the most reasonable guess is that it would disappear
  1995. completely in a tremendous final burst of emission, equivalent to the explosion of millions of H-bombs.
  1996. A black hole with a mass a few times that of the sun would have a temperature of only one ten millionth of a degree
  1997. above absolute zero. This is much less than the temperature of the microwave radiation that fills the universe (about
  1998. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  1999. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (5 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  2000. 2.7º above absolute zero), so such black holes would emit even less than they absorb. If the universe is destined to go
  2001. on expanding forever, the temperature of the microwave radiation will eventually decrease to less than that of such a
  2002. black hole, which will then begin to lose mass. But, even then, its temperature would be so low that it would take about
  2003. a million million million million million million million million million million million years (1 with sixty-six zeros after it) to
  2004. evaporate completely. This is much longer than the age of the universe, which is only about ten or twenty thousand
  2005. million years (1 or 2 with ten zeros after it). On the other hand, as mentioned in Chapter 6, there might be primordial
  2006. black holes with a very much smaller mass that were made by the collapse of irregularities in the very early stages of
  2007. the universe. Such black holes would have a much higher temperature and would be emitting radiation at a much
  2008. greater rate. A primordial black hole with an initial mass of a thousand million tons would have a lifetime roughly equal
  2009. to the age of the universe. Primordial black holes with initial masses less than this figure would already have
  2010. completely evaporated, but those with slightly greater masses would still be emitting radiation in the form of X rays and
  2011. gamma rays. These X rays and gamma rays are like waves of light, but with a much shorter wavelength. Such holes
  2012. hardly deserve the epithet black: they really are white hot and are emitting energy at a rate of about ten thousand
  2013. megawatts.
  2014. One such black hole could run ten large power stations, if only we could harness its power. This would be rather
  2015. difficult, however: the black hole would have the mass of a mountain compressed into less than a million millionth of an
  2016. inch, the size of the nucleus of an atom! If you had one of these black holes on the surface of the earth, there would be
  2017. no way to stop it from falling through the floor to the center of the earth. It would oscillate through the earth and back,
  2018. until eventually it settled down at the center. So the only place to put such a black hole, in which one might use the
  2019. energy that it emitted, would be in orbit around the earth – and the only way that one could get it to orbit the earth
  2020. would be to attract it there by towing a large mass in front of it, rather like a carrot in front of a donkey. This does not
  2021. sound like a very practical proposition, at least not in the immediate future.
  2022. But even if we cannot harness the emission from these primordial black holes, what are our chances of observing
  2023. them? We could look for the gamma rays that the primordial black holes emit during most of their lifetime. Although the
  2024. radiation from most would be very weak because they are far away, the total from all of them might be detectable. We
  2025. do observe such a background of gamma rays: Figure 7:5 shows how the observed intensity differs at different
  2026. frequencies (the number of waves per second). However, this background could have been, and probably was,
  2027. generated by processes other than primordial black holes. The dotted line in Figure 7:5 shows how the intensity should
  2028. vary with frequency for gamma rays given off by primordial black holes, if there were on average 300 per cubic
  2029. light-year. One can therefore say that the observations of the gamma ray background do not provide any positive
  2030. evidence for primordial black holes, but they do tell us that on average there cannot be more than 300 in every cubic
  2031. light-year in the universe. This limit means that primordial black holes could make up at most one millionth of the
  2032. matter in the universe.
  2033. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  2034. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (6 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  2035. Figure 7:5
  2036. With primordial black holes being so scarce, it might seem unlikely that there would be one near enough for us to
  2037. observe as an individual source of gamma rays. But since gravity would draw primordial black holes toward any matter,
  2038. they should be much more common in and around galaxies. So although the gamma ray background tells us that there
  2039. can be no more than 300 primordial black holes per cubic light-year on average, it tells us nothing about how common
  2040. they might be in our own galaxy. If they were, say, a million times more common than this, then the nearest black hole
  2041. to us would probably be at a distance of about a thousand million kilometers, or about as far away as Pluto, the farthest
  2042. known planet. At this distance it would still be very difficult to detect the steady emission of a black hole, even if it was
  2043. ten thousand megawatts. In order to observe a primordial black hole one would have to detect several gamma ray
  2044. quanta coming from the same direction within a reasonable space of time, such as a week. Otherwise, they might
  2045. simply be part of the background. But Planck’s quantum principle tells us that each gamma ray quantum has a very
  2046. high energy, because gamma rays have a very high frequency, so it would not take many quanta to radiate even ten
  2047. thousand megawatts. And to observe these few coming from the distance of Pluto would require a larger gamma ray
  2048. detector than any that have been constructed so far. Moreover, the detector would have to be in space, because
  2049. gamma rays cannot penetrate the atmosphere.
  2050. Of course, if a black hole as close as Pluto were to reach the end of its life and blow up, it would be easy to detect the
  2051. final burst of emission. But if the black hole has been emitting for the last ten or twenty thousand million years, the
  2052. chance of it reaching the end of its life within the next few years, rather than several million years in the past or future,
  2053. is really rather small! So in order to have a reasonable chance of seeing an explosion before your research grant ran
  2054. out, you would have to find a way to detect any explosions within a distance of about one light-year. In fact bursts of
  2055. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  2056. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (7 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  2057. gamma rays from space have been detected by satellites originally constructed to look for violations of the Test Ban
  2058. Treaty. These seem to occur about sixteen times a month and to be roughly uniformly distributed in direction across
  2059. the sky. This indicates that they come from outside the Solar System since otherwise we would expect them to be
  2060. concentrated toward the plane of the orbits of the planets. The uniform distribution also indicates that the sources are
  2061. either fairly near to us in our galaxy or right outside it at cosmological distances because otherwise, again, they would
  2062. be concentrated toward the plane of the galaxy. In the latter case, the energy required to account for the bursts would
  2063. be far too high to have been produced by tiny black holes, but if the sources were close in galactic terms, it might be
  2064. possible that they were exploding black holes. I would very much like this to be the case but I have to recognize that
  2065. there are other possible explanations for the gamma ray bursts, such as colliding neutron stars. New observations in
  2066. the next few years, particularly by gravitational wave detectors like LIGO, should enable us to discover the origin of the
  2067. gamma ray bursts.
  2068. Even if the search for primordial black holes proves negative, as it seems it may, it will still give us important
  2069. information about the very early stages of the universe. If the early universe had been chaotic or irregular, or if the
  2070. pressure of matter had been low, one would have expected it to produce many more primordial black holes than the
  2071. limit already set by our observations of the gamma ray background. Only if the early universe was very smooth and
  2072. uniform, with a high pressure, can one explain the absence of observable numbers of primordial black holes.
  2073. The idea of radiation from black holes was the first example of a prediction that depended in an essential way on both
  2074. the great theories of this century, general relativity and quantum mechanics. It aroused a lot of opposition initially
  2075. because it upset the existing viewpoint: “How can a black hole emit anything?” When I first announced the results of
  2076. my calculations at a conference at the Rutherford-Appleton Laboratory near Oxford, I was greeted with general
  2077. incredulity. At the end of my talk the chairman of the session, John G. Taylor from Kings College, London, claimed it
  2078. was all nonsense. He even wrote a paper to that effect. However, in the end most people, including John Taylor, have
  2079. come to the conclusion that black holes must radiate like hot bodies if our other ideas about general relativity and
  2080. quantum mechanics are correct. Thus, even though we have not yet managed to find a primordial black hole, there is
  2081. fairly general agreement that if we did, it would have to be emitting a lot of gamma rays and X rays.
  2082. The existence of radiation from black holes seems to imply that gravitational collapse is not as final and irreversible as
  2083. we once thought. If an astronaut falls into a black hole, its mass will increase, but eventually the energy equivalent of
  2084. that extra mass will be returned to the universe in the form of radiation. Thus, in a sense, the astronaut will be
  2085. “recycled.” It would be a poor sort of immortality, however, because any personal concept of time for the astronaut
  2086. would almost certainly come to an end as he was torn apart inside the black hole! Even the types of particles that were
  2087. eventually emitted by the black hole would in general be different from those that made up the astronaut: the only
  2088. feature of the astronaut that would survive would be his mass or energy.
  2089. The approximations I used to derive the emission from black holes should work well when the black hole has a mass
  2090. greater than a fraction of a gram. However, they will break down at the end of the black hole’s life when its mass gets
  2091. very small. The most likely outcome seems to be that the black hole will just disappear, at least from our region of the
  2092. universe, taking with it the astronaut and any singularity there might be inside it, if indeed there is one. This was the
  2093. first indication that quantum mechanics might remove the singularities that were predicted by general relativity.
  2094. However, the methods that I and other people were using in 1974 were not able to answer questions such as whether
  2095. singularities would occur in quantum gravity. From 1975 onward I therefore started to develop a more powerful
  2096. approach to quantum gravity based on Richard Feynrnan’s idea of a sum over histories. The answers that this
  2097. approach suggests for the origin and fate of the universe and its contents, such as astronauts, will be de-scribed in the
  2098. next two chapters. We shall see that although the uncertainty principle places limitations on the accuracy of all our
  2099. predictions, it may at the same time remove the fundamental unpredictability that occurs at a space-time singularity.
  2100. PREVIOUS NEXT
  2101. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 7
  2102. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/f.html (8 of 8) [2/20/2001 3:15:18 AM]
  2103. CHAPTER 8
  2104. THE ORIGIN AND FATE OF THE UNIVERSE
  2105. Einstein’s general theory of relativity, on its own, predicted that space-time began at the big bang singularity and
  2106. would come to an end either at the big crunch singularity (if the whole universe recollapsed), or at a singularity inside
  2107. a black hole (if a local region, such as a star, were to collapse). Any matter that fell into the hole would be destroyed
  2108. at the singularity, and only the gravitational effect of its mass would continue to be felt outside. On the other hand,
  2109. when quantum effects were taken into account, it seemed that the mass or energy of the matter would eventually be
  2110. returned to the rest of the universe, and that the black hole, along with any singularity inside it, would evaporate
  2111. away and finally disappear. Could quantum mechanics have an equally dramatic effect on the big bang and big
  2112. crunch singularities? What really happens during the very early or late stages of the universe, when gravitational
  2113. fields are so strong that quantum effects cannot be ignored? Does the universe in fact have a beginning or an end?
  2114. And if so, what are they like?
  2115. Throughout the 1970s I had been mainly studying black holes, but in 1981 my interest in questions about the origin
  2116. and fate of the universe was reawakened when I attended a conference on cosmology organized by the Jesuits in
  2117. the Vatican. The Catholic Church had made a bad mistake with Galileo when it tried to lay down the law on a
  2118. question of science, declaring that the sun went round the earth. Now, centuries later, it had decided to invite a
  2119. number of experts to advise it on cosmology. At the end of the conference the participants were granted an audience
  2120. with the Pope. He told us that it was all right to study the evolution of the universe after the big bang, but we should
  2121. not inquire into the big bang itself because that was the moment of Creation and therefore the work of God. I was
  2122. glad then that he did not know the subject of the talk I had just given at the conference – the possibility that
  2123. space-time was finite but had no boundary, which means that it had no beginning, no moment of Creation. I had no
  2124. desire to share the fate of Galileo, with whom I feel a strong sense of identity, partly because of the coincidence of
  2125. having been born exactly 300 years after his death!
  2126. In order to explain the ideas that I and other people have had about how quantum mechanics may affect the origin
  2127. and fate of the universe, it is necessary first to understand the generally accepted history of the universe, according
  2128. to what is known as the “hot big bang model.” This assumes that the universe is described by a Friedmann model,
  2129. right back to the big bang. In such models one finds that as the universe expands, any matter or radiation in it gets
  2130. cooler. (When the universe doubles in size, its temperature falls by half.) Since temperature is simply a measure of
  2131. the average energy – or speed – of the particles, this cooling of the universe would have a major effect on the matter
  2132. in it. At very high temperatures, particles would be moving around so fast that they could escape any attraction
  2133. toward each other due to nuclear or electromagnetic forces, but as they cooled off one would expect particles that
  2134. attract each other to start to clump together. Moreover, even the types of particles that exist in the universe would
  2135. depend on the temperature. At high enough temperatures, particles have so much energy that whenever they collide
  2136. many different particle/antiparticle pairs would be produced – and although some of these particles would annihilate
  2137. on hitting antiparticles, they would be produced more rap-idly than they could annihilate. At lower temperatures,
  2138. however, when colliding particles have less energy, particle/antiparticle pairs would be produced less quickly – and
  2139. annihilation would become faster than production.
  2140. At the big bang itself the universe is thought to have had zero size, and so to have been infinitely hot. But as the
  2141. universe expanded, the temperature of the radiation decreased. One second after the big bang, it would have fallen
  2142. to about ten thousand million degrees. This is about a thousand times the temperature at the center of the sun, but
  2143. temperatures as high as this are reached in H-bomb explosions. At this time the universe would have contained
  2144. mostly photons, electrons, and neutrinos (extremely light particles that are affected only by the weak force and
  2145. gravity) and their antiparticles, together with some protons and neutrons. As the universe continued to expand and
  2146. the temperature to drop, the rate at which electron/antielectron pairs were being produced in collisions would have
  2147. fallen below the rate at which they were being destroyed by annihilation. So most of the electrons and antielectrons
  2148. would have annihilated with each other to produce more photons, leaving only a few electrons left over. The
  2149. neutrinos and antineutrinos, however, would not have annihilated with each other, because these particles interact
  2150. with themselves and with other particles only very weakly. So they should still be around today. If we could observe
  2151. them, it would provide a good test of this picture of a very hot early stage of the universe. Unfortunately, their
  2152. energies nowadays would be too low for us to observe them directly. However, if neutrinos are not massless, but
  2153. have a small mass of their own, as suggested by some recent experiments, we might be able to detect them
  2154. indirectly: they could be a form of “dark matter,” like that mentioned earlier, with sufficient gravitational attraction to
  2155. stop the expansion of the universe and cause it to collapse again.
  2156. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2157. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (1 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2158. About one hundred seconds after the big bang, the temperature would have fallen to one thousand million degrees,
  2159. the temperature inside the hottest stars. At this temperature protons and neutrons would no longer have sufficient
  2160. energy to escape the attraction of the strong nuclear force, and would have started to combine together to produce
  2161. the nuclei of atoms of deuterium (heavy hydrogen), which contain one proton and one neutron. The deuterium nuclei
  2162. would then have combined with more protons and neutrons to make helium nuclei, which contain two protons and
  2163. two neutrons, and also small amounts of a couple of heavier elements, lithium and beryllium. One can calculate that
  2164. in the hot big bang model about a quarter of the protons and neutrons would have been converted into helium nuclei,
  2165. along with a small amount of heavy hydrogen and other elements. The remaining neutrons would have decayed into
  2166. protons, which are the nuclei of ordinary hydrogen atoms.
  2167. This picture of a hot early stage of the universe was first put forward by the scientist George Gamow in a famous
  2168. paper written in 1948 with a student of his, Ralph Alpher. Gamow had quite a sense of humor – he persuaded the
  2169. nuclear scientist Hans Bethe to add his name to the paper to make the list of authors “Alpher, Bethe, Gamow,” like
  2170. the first three letters of the Greek alphabet, alpha, beta, gamma: particularly appropriate for a paper on the beginning
  2171. of the universe! In this paper they made the remarkable prediction that radiation (in the form of photons) from the
  2172. very hot early stages of the universe should still be around today, but with its temperature reduced to only a few
  2173. degrees above absolute zero (–273ºC). It was this radiation that Penzias and Wilson found in 1965. At the time that
  2174. Alpher, Bethe, and Gamow wrote their paper, not much was known about the nuclear reactions of protons and
  2175. neutrons. Predictions made for the proportions of various elements in the early universe were therefore rather
  2176. inaccurate, but these calculations have been repeated in the light of better knowledge and now agree very well with
  2177. what we observe. It is, moreover, very difficult to explain in any other way why there should be so much helium in the
  2178. universe. We are therefore fairly confident that we have the right picture, at least back to about one second after the
  2179. big bang.
  2180. Within only a few hours of the big bang, the production of helium and other elements would have stopped. And after
  2181. that, for the next million years or so, the universe would have just continued expanding, without anything much
  2182. happening. Eventually, once the temperature had dropped to a few thousand degrees, and electrons and nuclei no
  2183. longer had enough energy to overcome the electromagnetic attraction between them, they would have started
  2184. combining to form atoms. The universe as a whole would have continued expanding and cooling, but in regions that
  2185. were slightly denser than average, the expansion would have been slowed down by the extra gravitational attraction.
  2186. This would eventually stop expansion in some regions and cause them to start to recollapse. As they were
  2187. collapsing, the gravitational pull of matter outside these regions might start them rotating slightly. As the collapsing
  2188. region got smaller, it would spin faster – just as skaters spinning on ice spin faster as they draw in their arms.
  2189. Eventually, when the region got small enough, it would be spinning fast enough to balance the attraction of gravity,
  2190. and in this way disklike rotating galaxies were born. Other regions, which did not happen to pick up a rotation, would
  2191. become oval-shaped objects called elliptical galaxies. In these, the region would stop collapsing because individual
  2192. parts of the galaxy would be orbiting stably round its center, but the galaxy would have no overall rotation.
  2193. As time went on, the hydrogen and helium gas in the galaxies would break up into smaller clouds that would collapse
  2194. under their own gravity. As these contracted, and the atoms within them collided with one another, the temperature
  2195. of the gas would increase, until eventually it became hot enough to start nuclear fusion reactions. These would
  2196. convert the hydrogen into more helium, and the heat given off would raise the pressure, and so stop the clouds from
  2197. contracting any further. They would remain stable in this state for a long time as stars like our sun, burning hydrogen
  2198. into helium and radiating the resulting energy as heat and light. More massive stars would need to be hotter to
  2199. balance their stronger gravitational attraction, making the nuclear fusion reactions proceed so much more rapidly that
  2200. they would use up their hydrogen in as little as a hundred million years. They would then contract slightly, and as
  2201. they heated up further, would start to convert helium into heavier elements like carbon or oxygen. This, however,
  2202. would not release much more energy, so a crisis would occur, as was described in the chapter on black holes. What
  2203. happens next is not completely clear, but it seems likely that the central regions of the star would collapse to a very
  2204. dense state, such as a neutron star or black hole. The outer regions of the star may sometimes get blown off in a
  2205. tremendous explosion called a supernova, which would outshine all the other stars in its galaxy. Some of the heavier
  2206. elements produced near the end of the star’s life would be flung back into the gas in the galaxy, and would provide
  2207. some of the raw material for the next generation of stars. Our own sun contains about 2 percent of these heavier
  2208. elements, because it is a second- or third-generation star, formed some five thousand million years ago out of a
  2209. cloud of rotating gas containing the debris of earlier supernovas. Most of the gas in that cloud went to form the sun or
  2210. got blown away, but a small amount of the heavier elements collected together to form the bodies that now orbit the
  2211. sun as planets like the earth.
  2212. The earth was initially very hot and without an atmosphere. In the course of time it cooled and acquired an
  2213. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2214. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (2 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2215. atmosphere from the emission of gases from the rocks. This early atmosphere was not one in which we could have
  2216. survived. It contained no oxygen, but a lot of other gases that are poisonous to us, such as hydrogen sulfide (the gas
  2217. that gives rotten eggs their smell). There are, however, other primitive forms of life that can flourish under such
  2218. conditions. It is thought that they developed in the oceans, possibly as a result of chance combinations of atoms into
  2219. large structures, called macromolecules, which were capable of assembling other atoms in the ocean into similar
  2220. structures. They would thus have reproduced themselves and multiplied. In some cases there would be errors in the
  2221. reproduction. Mostly these errors would have been such that the new macromolecule could not reproduce itself and
  2222. eventually would have been destroyed. However, a few of the errors would have produced new macromolecules that
  2223. were even better at reproducing themselves. They would have therefore had an advantage and would have tended
  2224. to replace the original macromolecules. In this way a process of evolution was started that led to the development of
  2225. more and more complicated, self-reproducing organisms. The first primitive forms of life consumed various materials,
  2226. including hydrogen sulfide, and released oxygen. This gradually changed the atmosphere to the composition that it
  2227. has today, and allowed the development of higher forms of life such as fish, reptiles, mammals, and ultimately the
  2228. human race.
  2229. This picture of a universe that started off very hot and cooled as it expanded is in agreement with all the
  2230. observational evidence that we have today. Nevertheless, it leaves a number of important questions unanswered:
  2231. 1. Why was the early universe so hot?
  2232. 2. Why is the universe so uniform on a large scale? Why does it look the same at all points of space and in all
  2233. directions? In particular, why is the temperature of the microwave back-ground radiation so nearly the same when we
  2234. look in different directions? It is a bit like asking a number of students an exam question. If they all give exactly the
  2235. same answer, you can be pretty sure they have communicated with each other. Yet, in the model described above,
  2236. there would not have been time since the big bang for light to get from one distant region to another, even though the
  2237. regions were close together in the early universe. According to the theory of relativity, if light cannot get from one
  2238. region to another, no other information can. So there would be no way in which different regions in the early universe
  2239. could have come to have the same temperature as each other, unless for some unexplained reason they happened
  2240. to start out with the same temperature.
  2241. 3. Why did the universe start out with so nearly the critical rate of expansion that separates models that recollapse
  2242. from those that go on expanding forever, that even now, ten thousand million years later, it is still expanding at nearly
  2243. the critical rate? If the rate of expansion one second after the big bang had been smaller by even one part in a
  2244. hundred thousand million million, the universe would have recollapsed before it ever reached its present size.
  2245. 4. Despite the fact that the universe is so uniform and homogeneous on a large scale, it contains local irregularities,
  2246. such as stars and galaxies. These are thought to have developed from small differences in the density of the early
  2247. universe from one region to another. What was the origin of these density fluctuations?
  2248. The general theory of relativity, on its own, cannot explain these features or answer these questions because of its
  2249. prediction that the universe started off with infinite density at the big bang singularity. At the singularity, general
  2250. relativity and all other physical laws would break down: one couldn’t predict what would come out of the singularity.
  2251. As explained before, this means that one might as well cut the big bang, and any events before it, out of the theory,
  2252. because they can have no effect on what we observe. Space-time would have a boundary – a beginning at the big
  2253. bang.
  2254. Science seems to have uncovered a set of laws that, within the limits set by the uncertainty principle, tell us how the
  2255. universe will develop with time, if we know its state at any one time. These laws may have originally been decreed by
  2256. God, but it appears that he has since left the universe to evolve according to them and does not now intervene in it.
  2257. But how did he choose the initial state or configuration of the universe? What were the “boundary conditions” at the
  2258. beginning of time?
  2259. One possible answer is to say that God chose the initial configuration of the universe for reasons that we cannot
  2260. hope to understand. This would certainly have been within the power of an omnipotent being, but if he had started it
  2261. off in such an incomprehensible way, why did he choose to let it evolve according to laws that we could understand?
  2262. The whole history of science has been the gradual realization that events do not happen in an arbitrary manner, but
  2263. that they reflect a certain underlying order, which may or may not be divinely inspired. It would be only natural to
  2264. suppose that this order should apply not only to the laws, but also to the conditions at the boundary of space-time
  2265. that specify the initial state of the universe. There may be a large number of models of the universe with different
  2266. initial conditions that all obey the laws. There ought to be some principle that picks out one initial state, and hence
  2267. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2268. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (3 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2269. one model, to represent our universe.
  2270. One such possibility is what are called chaotic boundary conditions. These implicitly assume either that the universe
  2271. is spatially infinite or that there are infinitely many universes. Under chaotic boundary conditions, the probability of
  2272. finding any particular region of space in any given configuration just after the big bang is the same, in some sense,
  2273. as the probability of finding it in any other configuration: the initial state of the universe is chosen purely randomly.
  2274. This would mean that the early universe would have probably been very chaotic and irregular because there are
  2275. many more chaotic and disordered configurations for the universe than there are smooth and ordered ones. (If each
  2276. configuration is equally probable, it is likely that the universe started out in a chaotic and disordered state, simply
  2277. because there are so many more of them.) It is difficult to see how such chaotic initial conditions could have given
  2278. rise to a universe that is so smooth and regular on a large scale as ours is today. One would also have expected the
  2279. density fluctuations in such a model to have led to the formation of many more primordial black holes than the upper
  2280. limit that has been set by observations of the gamma ray background.
  2281. If the universe is indeed spatially infinite, or if there are infinitely many universes, there would probably be some large
  2282. regions somewhere that started out in a smooth and uniform manner. It is a bit like the well-known horde of monkeys
  2283. hammering away on typewriters – most of what they write will be garbage, but very occasionally by pure chance they
  2284. will type out one of Shakespeare’s sonnets. Similarly, in the case of the universe, could it be that we are living in a
  2285. region that just happens by chance to be smooth and uniform? At first sight this might seem very improbable,
  2286. because such smooth regions would be heavily outnumbered by chaotic and irregular regions. However, suppose
  2287. that only in the smooth regions were galaxies and stars formed and were conditions right for the development of
  2288. complicated self-replicating organisms like ourselves who were capable of asking the question: why is the universe
  2289. so smooth.? This is an example of the application of what is known as the anthropic principle, which can be
  2290. paraphrased as “We see the universe the way it is because we exist.”
  2291. There are two versions of the anthropic principle, the weak and the strong. The weak anthropic principle states that
  2292. in a universe that is large or infinite in space and/or time, the conditions necessary for the development of intelligent
  2293. life will be met only in certain regions that are limited in space and time. The intelligent beings in these regions
  2294. should therefore not be surprised if they observe that their locality in the universe satisfies the conditions that are
  2295. necessary for their existence. It is a bit like a rich person living in a wealthy neighborhood not seeing any poverty.
  2296. One example of the use of the weak anthropic principle is to “explain” why the big bang occurred about ten thousand
  2297. million years ago – it takes about that long for intelligent beings to evolve. As explained above, an early generation of
  2298. stars first had to form. These stars converted some of the original hydrogen and helium into elements like carbon and
  2299. oxygen, out of which we are made. The stars then exploded as supernovas, and their debris went to form other stars
  2300. and planets, among them those of our Solar System, which is about five thousand million years old. The first one or
  2301. two thousand million years of the earth’s existence were too hot for the development of anything complicated. The
  2302. remaining three thousand million years or so have been taken up by the slow process of biological evolution, which
  2303. has led from the simplest organisms to beings who are capable of measuring time back to the big bang.
  2304. Few people would quarrel with the validity or utility of the weak anthropic principle. Some, however, go much further
  2305. and propose a strong version of the principle. According to this theory, there are either many different universes or
  2306. many different regions of a single universe, each with its own initial configuration and, perhaps, with its own set of
  2307. laws of science. In most of these universes the conditions would not be right for the development of complicated
  2308. organisms; only in the few universes that are like ours would intelligent beings develop and ask the question, “Why is
  2309. the universe the way we see it?” The answer is then simple: if it had been different, we would not be here!
  2310. The laws of science, as we know them at present, contain many fundamental numbers, like the size of the electric
  2311. charge of the electron and the ratio of the masses of the proton and the electron. We cannot, at the moment at least,
  2312. predict the values of these numbers from theory – we have to find them by observation. It may be that one day we
  2313. shall discover a complete unified theory that predicts them all, but it is also possible that some or all of them vary
  2314. from universe to universe or within a single universe. The remarkable fact is that the values of these numbers seem
  2315. to have been very finely adjusted to make possible the development of life. For example, if the electric charge of the
  2316. electron had been only slightly different, stars either would have been unable to burn hydrogen and helium, or else
  2317. they would not have exploded. Of course, there might be other forms of intelligent life, not dreamed of even by
  2318. writers of science fiction, that did not require the light of a star like the sun or the heavier chemical elements that are
  2319. made in stars and are flung back into space when the stars explode. Nevertheless, it seems clear that there are
  2320. relatively few ranges of values for the numbers that would allow the development of any form of intelligent life. Most
  2321. sets of values would give rise to universes that, although they might be very beautiful, would contain no one able to
  2322. wonder at that beauty. One can take this either as evidence of a divine purpose in Creation and the choice of the
  2323. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2324. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (4 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2325. laws of science or as support for the strong anthropic principle.
  2326. There are a number of objections that one can raise to the strong anthropic principle as an explanation of the
  2327. observed state of the universe. First, in what sense can all these different universes be said to exist? If they are
  2328. really separate from each other, what happens in another universe can have no observable consequences in our
  2329. own universe. We should therefore use the principle of economy and cut them out of the theory. If, on the other
  2330. hand, they are just different regions of a single universe, the laws of science would have to be the same in each
  2331. region, because otherwise one could not move continuously from one region to another. In this case the only
  2332. difference between the regions would be their initial configurations and so the strong anthropic principle would
  2333. reduce to the weak one.
  2334. A second objection to the strong anthropic principle is that it runs against the tide of the whole history of science. We
  2335. have developed from the geocentric cosmologies of Ptolemy and his forebears, through the heliocentric cosmology
  2336. of Copernicus and Galileo, to the modern picture in which the earth is a medium-sized planet orbiting around an
  2337. average star in the outer suburbs of an ordinary spiral galaxy, which is itself only one of about a million million
  2338. galaxies in the observable universe. Yet the strong anthropic principle would claim that this whole vast construction
  2339. exists simply for our sake. This is very hard to believe. Our Solar System is certainly a prerequisite for our existence,
  2340. hand one might extend this to the whole of our galaxy to allow for an earlier generation of stars that created the
  2341. heavier elements. But there does not seem to be any need for all those other galaxies, nor for the universe to be so
  2342. uniform and similar in every direction on the large scale.
  2343. One would feel happier about the anthropic principle, at least in its weak version, if one could show that quite a
  2344. number of different initial configurations for the universe would have evolved to produce a universe like the one we
  2345. observe. If this is the case, a universe that developed from some sort of random initial conditions should contain a
  2346. number of regions that are smooth and uniform and are suitable for the evolution of intelligent life. On the other hand,
  2347. if the initial state of the universe had to be chosen extremely carefully to lead to something like what we see around
  2348. us, the universe would be unlikely to contain any region in which life would appear. In the hot big bang model
  2349. described above, there was not enough time in the early universe for heat to have flowed from one region to another.
  2350. This means that the initial state of the universe would have to have had exactly the same temperature everywhere in
  2351. order to account for the fact that the microwave back-ground has the same temperature in every direction we look.
  2352. The initial rate of expansion also would have had to be chosen very precisely for the rate of expansion still to be so
  2353. close to the critical rate needed to avoid recollapse. This means that the initial state of the universe must have been
  2354. very carefully chosen indeed if the hot big bang model was correct right back to the beginning of time. It would be
  2355. very difficult to explain why the universe should have begun in just this way, except as the act of a God who intended
  2356. to create beings like us.
  2357. In an attempt to find a model of the universe in which many different initial configurations could have evolved to
  2358. something like the present universe, a scientist at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Alan Guth, suggested
  2359. that the early universe might have gone through a period of very rapid expansion. This expansion is said to be
  2360. “inflationary,” meaning that the universe at one time expanded at an increasing rate rather than the decreasing rate
  2361. that it does today. According to Guth, the radius of the universe increased by a million million million million million (1
  2362. with thirty zeros after it) times in only a tiny fraction of a second.
  2363. Guth suggested that the universe started out from the big bang in a very hot, but rather chaotic, state. These high
  2364. temperatures would have meant that the particles in the universe would be moving very fast and would have high
  2365. energies. As we discussed earlier, one would expect that at such high temperatures the strong and weak nuclear
  2366. forces and the electromagnetic force would all be unified into a single force. As the universe expanded, it would cool,
  2367. and particle energies would go down. Eventually there would be what is called a phase transition and the symmetry
  2368. between the forces would be broken: the strong force would become different from the weak and electromagnetic
  2369. forces. One common example of a phase transition is the freezing of water when you cool it down. Liquid water is
  2370. symmetrical, the same at every point and in every direction. However, when ice crystals form, they will have definite
  2371. positions and will be lined up in some direction. This breaks water’s symmetry.
  2372. In the case of water, if one is careful, one can “supercool” it: that is, one can reduce the temperature below the
  2373. freezing point (OºC) without ice forming. Guth suggested that the universe might behave in a similar way: the
  2374. temperature might drop below the critical value without the symmetry between the forces being broken. If this
  2375. happened, the universe would be in an unstable state, with more energy than if the symmetry had been broken. This
  2376. special extra energy can be shown to have an antigravitational effect: it would have acted just like the cosmological
  2377. constant that Einstein introduced into general relativity when he was trying to construct a static model of the
  2378. universe. Since the universe would already be expanding just as in the hot big bang model, the repulsive effect of
  2379. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2380. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (5 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2381. this cosmological constant would therefore have made the universe expand at an ever-increasing rate. Even in
  2382. regions where there were more matter particles than average, the gravitational attraction of the matter would have
  2383. been outweighed by the repulsion of the effective cosmological constant. Thus these regions would also expand in
  2384. an accelerating inflationary manner. As they expanded and the matter particles got farther apart, one would be left
  2385. with an expanding universe that contained hardly any particles and was still in the supercooled state. Any
  2386. irregularities in the universe would simply have been smoothed out by the expansion, as the wrinkles in a balloon are
  2387. smoothed away when you blow it up. Thus the present smooth and uniform state of the universe could have evolved
  2388. from many different non-uniform initial states.
  2389. In such a universe, in which the expansion was accelerated by a cosmological constant rather than slowed down by
  2390. the gravitational attraction of matter, there would be enough time for light to travel from one region to another in the
  2391. early universe. This could provide a solution to the problem, raised earlier, of why different regions in the early
  2392. universe have the same properties. Moreover, the rate of expansion of the universe would automatically become
  2393. very close to the critical rate determined by the energy density of the universe. This could then explain why the rate
  2394. of expansion is still so close to the critical rate, without having to assume that the initial rate of expansion of the
  2395. universe was very carefully chosen.
  2396. The idea of inflation could also explain why there is so much matter in the universe. There are something like ten
  2397. million million million million million million million million million million million million million million (1 with eighty
  2398. zeros after it) particles in the region of the universe that we can observe. Where did they all come from? The answer
  2399. is that, in quantum theory, particles can be created out of energy in the form of particle/antiparticle pairs. But that just
  2400. raises the question of where the energy came from. The answer is that the total energy of the universe is exactly
  2401. zero. The matter in the universe is made out of positive energy. However, the matter is all attracting itself by gravity.
  2402. Two pieces of matter that are close to each other have less energy than the same two pieces a long way apart,
  2403. because you have to expend energy to separate them against the gravitational force that is pulling them together.
  2404. Thus, in a sense, the gravitational field has negative energy. In the case of a universe that is approximately uniform
  2405. in space, one can show that this negative gravitational energy exactly cancels the positive energy represented by the
  2406. matter. So the total energy of the universe is zero.
  2407. Now twice zero is also zero. Thus the universe can double the amount of positive matter energy and also double the
  2408. negative gravitational energy without violation of the conservation of energy. This does not happen in the normal
  2409. expansion of the universe in which the matter energy density goes down as the universe gets bigger. It does happen,
  2410. however, in the inflationary expansion because the energy density of the supercooled state remains constant while
  2411. the universe expands: when the universe doubles in size, the positive matter energy and the negative gravitational
  2412. energy both double, so the total energy remains zero. During the inflationary phase, the universe increases its size
  2413. by a very large amount. Thus the total amount of energy available to make particles becomes very large. As Guth
  2414. has remarked, “It is said that there’s no such thing as a free lunch. But the universe is the ultimate free lunch.”
  2415. The universe is not expanding in an inflationary way today. Thus there has to be some mechanism that would
  2416. eliminate the very large effective cosmological constant and so change the rate of expansion from an accelerated
  2417. one to one that is slowed down by gravity, as we have today. In the inflationary expansion one might expect that
  2418. eventually the symmetry between the forces would be broken, just as super-cooled water always freezes in the end.
  2419. The extra energy of the unbroken symmetry state would then be released and would reheat the universe to a
  2420. temperature just below the critical temperature for symmetry between the forces. The universe would then go on to
  2421. expand and cool just like the hot big bang model, but there would now be an explanation of why the universe was
  2422. expanding at exactly the critical rate and why different regions had the same temperature.
  2423. In Guth’s original proposal the phase transition was supposed to occur suddenly, rather like the appearance of ice
  2424. crystals in very cold water. The idea was that “bubbles” of the new phase of broken symmetry would have formed in
  2425. the old phase, like bubbles of steam surrounded by boiling water. The bubbles were supposed to expand and meet
  2426. up with each other until the whole universe was in the new phase. The trouble was, as I and several other people
  2427. pointed out, that the universe was expanding so fast that even if the bubbles grew at the speed of light, they would
  2428. be moving away from each other and so could not join up. The universe would be left in a very non-uniform state,
  2429. with some regions still having symmetry between the different forces. Such a model of the universe would not
  2430. correspond to what we see.
  2431. In October 1981, I went to Moscow for a conference on quantum gravity. After the conference I gave a seminar on
  2432. the inflationary model and its problems at the Sternberg Astronomical Institute. Before this, I had got someone else
  2433. to give my lectures for me, because most people could not understand my voice. But there was not time to prepare
  2434. this seminar, so I gave it myself, with one of my graduate students repeating my words. It worked well, and gave me
  2435. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2436. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (6 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2437. much more contact with my audience. In the audience was a young Russian, Andrei Linde, from the Lebedev
  2438. Institute in Moscow. He said that the difficulty with the bubbles not joining up could be avoided if the bubbles were so
  2439. big that our region of the universe is all contained inside a single bubble. In order for this to work, the change from
  2440. symmetry to broken symmetry must have taken place very slowly inside the bubble, but this is quite possible
  2441. according to grand unified theories. Linde’s idea of a slow breaking of symmetry was very good, but I later realized
  2442. that his bubbles would have to have been bigger than the size of the universe at the time! I showed that instead the
  2443. symmetry would have broken everywhere at the same time, rather than just inside bubbles. This would lead to a
  2444. uniform universe, as we observe. I was very excited by this idea and discussed it with one of my students, Ian Moss.
  2445. As a friend of Linde’s, I was rather embarrassed, however, when I was later sent his paper by a scientific journal and
  2446. asked whether it was suitable for publication. I replied that there was this flaw about the bubbles being bigger than
  2447. the universe, but that the basic idea of a slow breaking of symmetry was very good. I recommended that the paper ¿
  2448. published as it was because it would take Linde several months to correct it, since anything he sent to the West
  2449. would have to be passed by Soviet censorship, which was neither very skillful nor very quick with scientific papers.
  2450. Instead, I wrote a short paper with Ian Moss in the same journal in which we pointed out this problem with the bubble
  2451. and showed how it could be resolved.
  2452. The day after I got back from Moscow I set out for Philadelphia, where I was due to receive a medal from the
  2453. Franklin Institute. My secretary, Judy Fella, had used her not inconsiderable charm to persuade British Airways to
  2454. give herself and me free seats on a Concorde as a publicity venture. However, I .was held up on my way to the
  2455. airport by heavy rain and I missed the plane. Nevertheless, I got to Philadelphia in the end and received my medal. I
  2456. was then asked to give a seminar on the inflationary universe at Drexel University in Philadelphia. I gave the same
  2457. seminar about the problems of the inflationary universe, just as in Moscow.
  2458. A very similar idea to Linde’s was put forth independently a few months later by Paul Steinhardt and Andreas
  2459. Albrecht of the University of Pennsylvania. They are now given joint credit with Linde for what is called “the new
  2460. inflationary model,” based on the idea of a slow breaking of symmetry. (The old inflationary model was Guth’s
  2461. original suggestion of fast symmetry breaking with the formation of bubbles.)
  2462. The new inflationary model was a good attempt to explain why the universe is the way it is. However, I and several
  2463. other people showed that, at least in its original form, it predicted much greater variations in the temperature of the
  2464. microwave background radiation than are observed. Later work has also cast doubt on whether there could be a
  2465. phase transition in the very early universe of the kind required. In my personal opinion, the new inflationary model is
  2466. now dead as a scientific theory, although a lot of people do not seem to have heard of its demise and are still writing
  2467. papers as if it were viable. A better model, called the chaotic inflationary model, was put forward by Linde in 1983. In
  2468. this there is no phase transition or supercooling. Instead, there is a spin 0 field, which, because of quantum
  2469. fluctuations, would have large values in some regions of the early universe. The energy of the field in those regions
  2470. would behave like a cosmological constant. It would have a repulsive gravitational effect, and thus make those
  2471. regions expand in an inflationary manner. As they expanded, the energy of the field in them would slowly decrease
  2472. until the inflationary expansion changed to an expansion like that in the hot big bang model. One of these regions
  2473. would become what we now see as the observable universe. This model has all the advantages of the earlier
  2474. inflationary models, but it does not depend on a dubious phase transition, and it can moreover give a reasonable size
  2475. for the fluctuations in the temperature of the microwave background that agrees with observation.
  2476. This work on inflationary models showed that the present state of the universe could have arisen from quite a large
  2477. number of different initial configurations. This is important, because it shows that the initial state of the part of the
  2478. universe that we inhabit did not have to be chosen with great care. So we may, if we wish, use the weak anthropic
  2479. principle to explain why the universe looks the way it does now. It cannot be the case, however, that every initial
  2480. configuration would have led to a universe like the one we observe. One can show this by considering a very
  2481. different state for the universe at the present time, say, a very lumpy and irregular one. One could use the laws of
  2482. science to evolve the universe back in time to determine its configuration at earlier times. According to the singularity
  2483. theorems of classical general relativity, there would still have been a big bang singularity. If you evolve such a
  2484. universe forward in time according to the laws of science, you will end up with the lumpy and irregular state you
  2485. started with. Thus there must have been initial configurations that would not have given rise to a universe like the
  2486. one we see today. So even the inflationary model does not tell us why the initial configuration was not such as to
  2487. produce something very different from what we observe. Must we turn to the anthropic principle for an explanation?
  2488. Was it all just a lucky chance? That would seem a counsel of despair, a negation of all our hopes of understanding
  2489. the underlying order of the universe.
  2490. In order to predict how the universe should have started off, one needs laws that hold at the beginning of time. If the
  2491. classical theory of general relativity was correct, the singularity theorems that Roger Penrose and I proved show that
  2492. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2493. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (7 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2494. the beginning of time would have been a point of infinite density and infinite curvature of space-time. All the known
  2495. laws of science would break down at such a point. One might suppose that there were new laws that held at
  2496. singularities, but it would be very difficult even to formulate such laws at such badly behaved points, and we would
  2497. have no guide from observations as to what those laws might be. However, what the singularity theorems really
  2498. indicate is that the gravitational field becomes so strong that quantum gravitational effects become important:
  2499. classical theory is no longer a good description of the universe. So one has to use a quantum theory of gravity to
  2500. discuss the very early stages of the universe. As we shall see, it is possible in the quantum theory for the ordinary
  2501. laws of science to hold everywhere, including at the beginning of time: it is not necessary to postulate new laws for
  2502. singularities, because there need not be any singularities in the quantum theory.
  2503. We don’t yet have a complete and consistent theory that combines quantum mechanics and gravity. However, we
  2504. are fairly certain of some features that such a unified theory should have. One is that it should incorporate
  2505. Feynman’s proposal to formulate quantum theory in terms of a sum over histories. In this approach, a particle does
  2506. not have just a single history, as it would in a classical theory. Instead, it is supposed to follow every possible path in
  2507. space-time, and with each of these histories there are associated a couple of numbers, one represent-ing the size of
  2508. a wave and the other representing its position in the cycle (its phase). The probability that the particle, say, passes
  2509. through some particular point is found by adding up the waves associated with every possible history that passes
  2510. through that point. When one actually tries to perform these sums, however, one runs into severe technical
  2511. problems. The only way around these is the following peculiar prescription: one must add up the waves for particle
  2512. histories that are not in the “real” time that you and I experience but take place in what is called imaginary time.
  2513. Imaginary time may sound like science fiction but it is in fact a well-defined mathematical concept. If we take any
  2514. ordinary (or “real”) number and multiply it by itself, the result is a positive number. (For example, 2 times 2 is 4, but
  2515. so is – 2 times – 2.) There are, however, special numbers (called imaginary numbers) that give negative numbers
  2516. when multiplied by themselves. (The one called i, when multiplied by itself, gives – 1, 2i multiplied by itself gives – 4,
  2517. and so on.)
  2518. One can picture real and imaginary numbers in the following way: The real numbers can be represented by a line
  2519. going from left to right, with zero in the middle, negative numbers like – 1, – 2, etc. on the left, and positive numbers,
  2520. 1, 2, etc. on the right. Then imaginary numbers are represented by a line going up and down the page, with i, 2i, etc.
  2521. above the middle, and – i, – 2i, etc. below. Thus imaginary numbers are in a sense numbers at right angles to
  2522. ordinary real numbers.
  2523. To avoid the technical difficulties with Feynman’s sum over histories, one must use imaginary time. That is to say, for
  2524. the purposes of the calculation one must measure time using imaginary numbers, rather than real ones. This has an
  2525. interesting effect on space-time: the distinction between time and space disappears completely. A space-time in
  2526. which events have imaginary values of the time coordinate is said to be Euclidean, after the ancient Greek Euclid,
  2527. who founded the study of the geometry of two-dimensional surfaces. What we now call Euclidean space-time is very
  2528. similar except that it has four dimensions instead of two. In Euclidean space-time there is no difference between the
  2529. time direction and directions in space. On the other hand, in real space-time, in which events are labeled by ordinary,
  2530. real values of the time coordinate, it is easy to tell the difference – the time direction at all points lies within the light
  2531. cone, and space directions lie outside. In any case, as far as everyday quantum mechanics is concerned, we may
  2532. regard our use of imaginary time and Euclidean space-time as merely a mathematical device (or trick) to calculate
  2533. answers about real space-time.
  2534. A second feature that we believe must be part of any ultimate theory is Einstein’s idea that the gravitational field is
  2535. represented by curved space-time: particles try to follow the nearest thing to a straight path in a curved space, but
  2536. because space-time is not flat their paths appear to be bent, as if by a gravitational field. When we apply Feynman’s
  2537. sum over histories to Einstein’s view of gravity, the analogue of the history of a particle is now a complete curved
  2538. space-time that represents the history of the whole universe. To avoid the technical difficulties in actually performing
  2539. the sum over histories, these curved space-times must be taken to be Euclidean. That is, time is imaginary and is
  2540. indistinguishable from directions in space. To calculate the probability of finding a real space-time with some certain
  2541. property, such as looking the same at every point and in every direction, one adds up the waves associated with all
  2542. the histories that have that property.
  2543. In the classical theory of general relativity, there are many different possible curved space-times, each corresponding
  2544. to a different initial state of the universe. If we knew the initial state of our universe, we would know its entire history.
  2545. Similarly, in the quantum theory of gravity, there are many different possible quantum states for the universe. Again,
  2546. if we knew how the Euclidean curved space-times in the sum over histories behaved at early times, we would know
  2547. the quantum state of the universe.
  2548. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2549. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (8 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2550. In the classical theory of gravity, which is based on real space-time, there are only two possible ways the universe
  2551. can behave: either it has existed for an infinite time, or else it had a beginning at a singularity at some finite time in
  2552. the past. In the quantum theory of gravity, on the other hand, a third possibility arises. Because one is using
  2553. Euclidean space-times, in which the time direction is on the same footing as directions in space, it is possible for
  2554. space-time to be finite in extent and yet to have no singularities that formed a boundary or edge. Space-time would
  2555. be like the surface of the earth, only with two more dimensions. The surface of the earth is finite in extent but it
  2556. doesn’t have a boundary or edge: if you sail off into the sunset, you don’t fall off the edge or run into a singularity. (I
  2557. know, because I have been round the world!)
  2558. If Euclidean space-time stretches back to infinite imaginary time, or else starts at a singularity in imaginary time, we
  2559. have the same problem as in the classical theory of specifying the initial state of the universe: God may know how
  2560. the universe began, but we cannot give any particular reason for thinking it began one way rather than another. On
  2561. the other hand, the quantum theory of gravity has opened up a new possibility, in which there would be no boundary
  2562. to space-time and so there would be no need to specify the behavior at the boundary. There would be no
  2563. singularities at which the laws of science broke down, and no edge of space-time at which one would have to appeal
  2564. to God or some new law to set the boundary conditions for space-time. One could say: “The boundary condition of
  2565. the universe is that it has no boundary.” The universe would be completely self-contained and not affected by
  2566. anything outside itself. It would neither be created nor destroyed, It would just BE.
  2567. It was at the conference in the Vatican mentioned earlier that I first put forward the suggestion that maybe time and
  2568. space together formed a surface that was finite in size but did not have any boundary or edge. My paper was rather
  2569. mathematical, however, so its implications for the role of God in the creation of the universe were not generally
  2570. recognized at the time (just as well for me). At the time of the Vatican conference, I did not know how to use the “no
  2571. boundary” idea to make predictions about the universe. However, I spent the following sum-mer at the University of
  2572. California, Santa Barbara. There a friend and colleague of mine, Jim Hartle, worked out with me what conditions the
  2573. universe must satisfy if space-time had no boundary. When I returned to Cambridge, I continued this work with two of
  2574. my research students, Julian Luttrel and Jonathan Halliwell.
  2575. I’d like to emphasize that this idea that time and space should be finite “without boundary” is just a proposal: it cannot
  2576. be deduced from some other principle. Like any other scientific theory, it may initially be put forward for aesthetic or
  2577. metaphysical reasons, but the real test is whether it makes predictions that agree with observation. This, how-ever, is
  2578. difficult to determine in the case of quantum gravity, for two reasons. First, as will be explained in Chapter 11, we are
  2579. not yet sure exactly which theory successfully combines general relativity and quantum mechanics, though we know
  2580. quite a lot about the form such a theory must have. Second, any model that described the whole universe in detail
  2581. would be much too complicated mathematically for us to be able to calculate exact predictions. One therefore has to
  2582. make simplifying assumptions and approximations – and even then, the problem of extracting predictions remains a
  2583. formidable one.
  2584. Each history in the sum over histories will describe not only the space-time but everything in it as well, including any
  2585. complicated organisms like human beings who can observe the history of the universe. This may provide another
  2586. justification for the anthropic principle, for if all the histories are possible, then so long as we exist in one of the
  2587. histories, we may use the anthropic principle to explain why the universe is found to be the way it is. Exactly what
  2588. meaning can be attached to the other histories, in which we do not exist, is not clear. This view of a quantum theory
  2589. of gravity would be much more satisfactory, however, if one could show that, using the sum over histories, our
  2590. universe is not just one of the possible histories but one of the most probable ones. To do this, we must perform the
  2591. sum over histories for all possible Euclidean space-times that have no boundary.
  2592. Under the “no boundary” proposal one learns that the chance of the universe being found to be following most of the
  2593. possible histories is negligible, but there is a particular family of histories that are much more probable than the
  2594. others. These histories may be pictured as being like the surface of the earth, with the distance from the North Pole
  2595. representing imaginary time and the size of a circle of constant distance from the North Pole representing the spatial
  2596. size of the universe. The universe starts at the North Pole as a single point. As one moves south, the circles of
  2597. latitude at constant distance from the North Pole get bigger, corresponding to the universe expanding with imaginary
  2598. time Figure 8:1. The universe would reach a maximum size at the equator and would contract with increasing
  2599. imaginary time to a single point at the South Pole. Ever though the universe would have zero size at the North and
  2600. South Poles, these points would not be singularities, any more than the North aid South Poles on the earth are
  2601. singular. The laws of science will hold at them, just as they do at the North and South Poles on the earth.
  2602. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2603. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (9 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2604. Figure 8:1
  2605. The history of the universe in real time, however, would look very different. At about ten or twenty thousand million
  2606. years ago, it would have a minimum size, which was equal to the maximum radius of the history in imaginary time. At
  2607. later real times, the universe would expand like the chaotic inflationary model proposed by Linde (but one would not
  2608. now have to assume that the universe was created somehow in the right sort of state). The universe would expand to
  2609. a very large size Figure 8:1 and eventually it would collapse again into what looks like a singularity in real time. Thus,
  2610. in a sense, we are still all doomed, even if we keep away from black holes. Only if we could picture the universe in
  2611. terms of imaginary time would there be no singularities.
  2612. If the universe really is in such a quantum state, there would be no singularities in the history of the universe in
  2613. imaginary time. It might seem therefore that my more recent work had completely undone the results of my earlier
  2614. work on singularities. But, as indicated above, the real importance of the singularity theorems was that they showed
  2615. that the gravitational field must become so strong that quantum gravitational effects could not be ignored. This in turn
  2616. led to the idea that the universe could be finite in imaginary time but without boundaries or singularities. When one
  2617. goes back to the real time in which we live, however, there will still appear to be singularities. The poor astronaut
  2618. who falls into a black hole will still come to a sticky end; only if he lived in imaginary time would he encounter no
  2619. singularities.
  2620. This might suggest that the so-called imaginary time is really the real time, and that what we call real time is just a
  2621. figment of our imaginations. In real time, the universe has a beginning and an end at singularities that form a
  2622. boundary to space-time and at which the laws of science break down. But in imaginary time, there are no
  2623. singularities or boundaries. So maybe what we call imaginary time is really more basic, and what we call real is just
  2624. an idea that we invent to help us describe what we think the universe is like. But according to the approach I
  2625. described in Chapter 1, a scientific theory is just a mathematical model we make to describe our observations: it
  2626. exists only in our minds. So it is meaningless to ask: which is real, “real” or “imaginary” time? It is simply a matter of
  2627. which is the more useful description.
  2628. One can also use the sum over histories, along with the no boundary proposal, to find which properties of the
  2629. universe are likely to occur together. For example, one can calculate the probability that the universe is expanding at
  2630. nearly the same rate in all different directions at a time when the density of the universe has its present value. In the
  2631. simplified models that have been examined so far, this probability turns out to be high; that is, the proposed no
  2632. boundary condition leads to the prediction that it is extremely probable that the present rate of expansion of the
  2633. universe is almost the same in each direction. This is consistent with the observations of the microwave background
  2634. radiation, which show that it has almost exactly the same intensity in any direction. If the universe were expanding
  2635. faster in some directions than in others, the intensity of the radiation in those directions would be reduced by an
  2636. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2637. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (10 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2638. additional red shift.
  2639. Further predictions of the no boundary condition are currently being worked out. A particularly interesting problem is
  2640. the size of the small departures from uniform density in the early universe that caused the formation first of the
  2641. galaxies, then of stars, and finally of us. The uncertainty principle implies that the early universe cannot have been
  2642. completely uniform because there must have been some uncertainties or fluctuations in the positions and velocities
  2643. of the particles. Using the no boundary condition, we find that the universe must in fact have started off with just the
  2644. minimum possible non-uniformity allowed by the uncertainty principle. The universe would have then undergone a
  2645. period of rapid expansion, as in the inflationary models. During this period, the initial non-uniformities would have
  2646. been amplified until they were big enough to explain the origin of the structures we observe around us. In 1992 the
  2647. Cosmic Background Explorer satellite (COBE) first detected very slight variations in the intensity of the microwave
  2648. background with direction. The way these non-uniformities depend on direction seems to agree with the predictions
  2649. of the inflationary model and the no boundary proposal. Thus the no boundary proposal is a good scientific theory in
  2650. the sense of Karl Popper: it could have been falsified by observations but instead its predictions have been
  2651. confirmed. In an expanding universe in which the density of matter varied slightly from place to place, gravity would
  2652. have caused the denser regions to slow down their expansion and start contracting. This would lead to the formation
  2653. of galaxies, stars, and eventually even insignificant creatures like ourselves. Thus all the complicated structures that
  2654. we see in the universe might be explained by the no boundary condition for the universe together with the uncertainty
  2655. principle of quantum mechanics.
  2656. The idea that space and time may form a closed surface without boundary also has profound implications for the role
  2657. of God in the affairs of the universe. With the success of scientific theories in describing events, most people have
  2658. come to believe that God allows the universe to evolve according to a set of laws and does not intervene in the
  2659. universe to break these laws. However, the laws do not tell us what the universe should have looked like when it
  2660. started – it would still be up to God to wind up the clockwork and choose how to start it off. So long as the universe
  2661. had a beginning, we could suppose it had a creator. But if the universe is really completely self-contained, having no
  2662. boundary or edge, it would have neither beginning nor end: it would simply be. What place, then, for a creator?
  2663. PREVIOUS NEXT
  2664. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 8
  2665. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/g.html (11 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:29 AM]
  2666. CHAPTER 9
  2667. THE ARROW OF TIME
  2668. In previous chapters we have seen how our views of the nature of time have changed over the years. Up to the
  2669. beginning of this century people believed in an absolute time. That is, each event could be labeled by a number
  2670. called “time” in a unique way, and all good clocks would agree on the time interval between two events.
  2671. However, the discovery that the speed of light appeared the same to every observer, no matter how he was
  2672. moving, led to the theory of relativity – and in that one had to abandon the idea that there was a unique
  2673. absolute time. Instead, each observer would have his own measure of time as recorded by a clock that he
  2674. carried: clocks carried by different observers would not necessarily agree. Thus time became a more personal
  2675. concept, relative to the observer who measured it.
  2676. When one tried to unify gravity with quantum mechanics, one had to introduce the idea of “imaginary” time.
  2677. Imaginary time is indistinguishable from directions in space. If one can go north, one can turn around and head
  2678. south; equally, if one can go forward in imaginary time, one ought to be able to turn round and go backward.
  2679. This means that there can be no important difference between the forward and backward directions of
  2680. imaginary time. On the other hand, when one looks at “real” time, there’s a very big difference between the
  2681. forward and backward directions, as we all know. Where does this difference between the past and the future
  2682. come from? Why do we remember the past but not the future?
  2683. The laws of science do not distinguish between the past and the future. More precisely, as explained earlier,
  2684. the laws of science are unchanged under the combination of operations (or symmetries) known as C, P, and T.
  2685. (C means changing particles for antiparticles. P means taking the mirror image, so left and right are
  2686. interchanged. And T means reversing the direction of motion of all particles: in effect, running the motion
  2687. backward.) The laws of science that govern the behavior of matter under all normal situations are unchanged
  2688. under the combination of the two operations C and P on their own. In other words, life would be just the same
  2689. for the inhabitants of another planet who were both mirror images of us and who were made of antimatter,
  2690. rather than matter.
  2691. If the laws of science are unchanged by the combination of operations C and P, and also by the combination C,
  2692. P, and T, they must also be unchanged under the operation T alone. Yet there is a big difference between the
  2693. forward and backward directions of real time in ordinary life. Imagine a cup of water falling off a table and
  2694. breaking into pieces on the floor. If you take a film of this, you can easily tell whether it is being run forward or
  2695. backward. If you run it backward you will see the pieces suddenly gather themselves together off the floor and
  2696. jump back to form a whole cup on the table. You can tell that the film is being run backward because this kind
  2697. of behavior is never observed in ordinary life. If it were, crockery manufacturers would go out of business.
  2698. The explanation that is usually given as to why we don’t see broken cups gathering themselves together off the
  2699. floor and jumping back onto the table is that it is forbidden by the second law of thermodynamics. This says that
  2700. in any closed system disorder, or entropy, always increases with time. In other words, it is a form of Murphy’s
  2701. law: things always tend to go wrong! An intact cup on the table is a state of high order, but a broken cup on the
  2702. floor is a disordered state. One can go readily from the cup on the table in the past to the broken cup on the
  2703. floor in the future, but not the other way round.
  2704. The increase of disorder or entropy with time is one example of what is called an arrow of time, something that
  2705. distinguishes the past from the future, giving a direction to time. There are at least three different arrows of
  2706. time. First, there is the thermodynamic arrow of time, the direction of time in which disorder or entropy
  2707. increases. Then, there is the psychological arrow of time. This is the direction in which we feel time passes, the
  2708. direction in which we remember the past but not the future. Finally, there is the cosmological arrow of time. This
  2709. is the direction of time in which the universe is expanding rather than contracting.
  2710. In this chapter I shall argue that the no boundary condition for the universe, together with the weak anthropic
  2711. principle, can explain why all three arrows point in the same direction – and moreover, why a well-defined arrow
  2712. of time should exist at all. I shall argue that the psychological arrow is determined by the thermodynamic arrow,
  2713. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 9
  2714. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/h.html (1 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:38 AM]
  2715. and that these two arrows necessarily always point in the same direction. If one assumes the no boundary
  2716. condition for the universe, we shall see that there must be well-defined thermodynamic and cosmological
  2717. arrows of time, but they will not point in the same direction for the whole history of the universe. However, I
  2718. shall argue that it is only when they do point in the same direction that conditions are suitable for the
  2719. development of intelligent beings who can ask the question: why does disorder increase in the same direction
  2720. of time as that in which the universe expands?
  2721. I shall discuss first the thermodynamic arrow of time. The second law of thermodynamics results from the fact
  2722. that there are always many more disordered states than there are ordered ones. For example, consider the
  2723. pieces of a jigsaw in a box. There is one, and. only one, arrangement in which the pieces make a complete
  2724. picture. On the other hand, there are a very large number of arrangements in which the pieces are disordered
  2725. and don’t make a picture.
  2726. Suppose a system starts out in one of the small number of ordered states. As time goes by, the system will
  2727. evolve according to the laws of science and its state will change. At a later time, it is more probable that the
  2728. system will be in a disordered state than in an ordered one because there are more disordered states. Thus
  2729. disorder will tend to increase with time if the system obeys an initial condition of high order.
  2730. Suppose the pieces of the jigsaw start off in a box in the ordered arrangement in which they form a picture. If
  2731. you shake the box, the pieces will take up another arrangement. This will probably be a disordered
  2732. arrangement in which the pieces don’t form a proper picture, simply because there are so many more
  2733. disordered arrangements. Some groups of pieces may still form parts of the picture, but the more you shake
  2734. the box, the more likely it is that these groups will get broken up and the pieces will be in a completely jumbled
  2735. state in which they don’t form any sort of picture. So the disorder of the pieces will probably increase with time if
  2736. the pieces obey the initial condition that they start off in a condition of high order.
  2737. Suppose, however, that God decided that the universe should finish up in a state of high order but that it didn’t
  2738. matter what state it started in. At early times the universe would probably be in a disordered state. This would
  2739. mean that disorder would decrease with time. You would see broken cups gathering themselves together and
  2740. jumping back onto the table. However, any human beings who were observing the cups would be living in a
  2741. universe in which disorder decreased with time. I shall argue that such beings would have a psychological
  2742. arrow of time that was backward. That is, they would remember events in the future, and not remember events
  2743. in their past. When the cup was broken, they would remember it being on the table, but when it was on the
  2744. table, they would not remember it being on the floor.
  2745. It is rather difficult to talk about human memory because we don’t know how the brain works in detail. We do,
  2746. however, know all about how computer memories work. I shall therefore discuss the psychological arrow of
  2747. time for computers. I think it is reasonable to assume that the arrow for computers is the same as that for
  2748. humans. If it were not, one could make a killing on the stock exchange by having a computer that would
  2749. remember tomorrow’s prices! A computer memory is basically a device containing elements that can exist in
  2750. either of two states. A simple example is an abacus. In its simplest form, this consists of a number of wires; on
  2751. each wire there are a number of beads that can be put in one of two positions. Before an item is recorded in a
  2752. computer’s memory, the memory is in a disordered state, with equal probabilities for the two possible states.
  2753. (The abacus beads are scattered randomly on the wires of the abacus.) After the memory interacts with the
  2754. system to be remembered, it will definitely be in one state or the other, according to the state of the system.
  2755. (Each abacus bead will be at either the left or the right of the abacus wire.) So the memory has passed from a
  2756. disordered state to an ordered one. However, in order to make sure that the memory is in the right state, it is
  2757. necessary to use a certain amount of energy (to move the bead or to power the computer, for example). This
  2758. energy is dissipated as heat, and increases the amount of disorder in the universe. One can show that this
  2759. increase in disorder is always greater than the increase in the order of the memory itself. Thus the heat
  2760. expelled by the computer’s cooling fan means that when a computer records an item in memory, the total
  2761. amount of disorder in the universe still goes up. The direction of time in which a computer remembers the past
  2762. is the same as that in which disorder increases.
  2763. Our subjective sense of the direction of time, the psychological arrow of time, is therefore determined within our
  2764. brain by the thermodynamic arrow of time. Just like a computer, we must remember things in the order in which
  2765. entropy increases. This makes the second law of thermodynamics almost trivial. Disorder increases with time
  2766. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 9
  2767. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/h.html (2 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:38 AM]
  2768. because we measure time in the direction in which disorder increases You can’t have a safer bet than that!
  2769. But why should the thermodynamic arrow of time exist at all? Or, in other words, why should the universe be in
  2770. a state of high order at one end of time, the end that we call the past? Why is it not in a state of complete
  2771. disorder at all times? After all, this might seem more probable. And why is the direction of time in which
  2772. disorder increases the same as that in which the universe expands?
  2773. In the classical theory of general relativity one cannot predict how the universe would have begun because all
  2774. the known laws of science would have broken down at the big bang singularity. The universe could have
  2775. started out in a very smooth and ordered state. This would have led to well-defined thermodynamic and
  2776. cosmological arrows of time, as we observe. But it could equally well have started out in a very lumpy and
  2777. disordered state. In that case, the universe would already be in a state of complete disorder, so disorder could
  2778. not increase with time. It would either stay constant, in which case there would be no well-defined
  2779. thermodynamic arrow of time, or it would decrease, in which case the thermodynamic arrow of time would point
  2780. in the opposite direction to the cosmological arrow. Neither of these possibilities agrees with what we observe.
  2781. However, as we have seen, classical general relativity predicts its own downfall. When the curvature of
  2782. space-time becomes large, quantum gravitational effects will become important and the classical theory will
  2783. cease to be a good description of the universe. One has to use a quantum theory of gravity to understand how
  2784. the universe began.
  2785. In a quantum theory of gravity, as we saw in the last chapter, in order to specify the state of the universe one
  2786. would still have to say how the possible histories of the universe would behave at the boundary of space-time in
  2787. the past. One could avoid this difficulty of having to describe what we do not and cannot know only if the
  2788. histories satisfy the no boundary condition: they are finite in extent but have no boundaries, edges, or
  2789. singularities. In that case, the beginning of time would be a regular, smooth point of space-time and the
  2790. universe would have begun its expansion in a very smooth and ordered state. It could not have been
  2791. completely uniform, because that would violate the uncertainty principle of quantum theory. There had to be
  2792. small fluctuations in the density and velocities of particles. The no boundary condition, however, implied that
  2793. these fluctuations were as small as they could be, consistent with the uncertainty principle.
  2794. The universe would have started off with a period of exponential or “inflationary” expansion in which it would
  2795. have increased its size by a very large factor. During this expansion, the density fluctuations would have
  2796. remained small at first, but later would have started to grow. Regions in which the density was slightly higher
  2797. than average would have had their expansion slowed down by the gravitational attraction of the extra mass.
  2798. Eventually, such regions would stop expanding and collapse to form galaxies, stars, and beings like us. The
  2799. universe would have started in a smooth and ordered state, and would become lumpy and disordered as time
  2800. went on. This would explain the existence of the thermodynamic arrow of time.
  2801. But what would happen if and when the universe stopped expanding and began to contract? Would the
  2802. thermodynamic arrow reverse and disorder begin to decrease with time? This would lead to all sorts of
  2803. science-fiction-like possibilities for people who survived from the expanding to the contracting phase. Would
  2804. they see broken cups gathering themselves together off the floor and jumping back onto the table? Would they
  2805. be able to remember tomorrow’s prices and make a fortune on the stock market? It might seem a bit academic
  2806. to worry about what will happen when the universe collapses again, as it will not start to contract for at least
  2807. another ten thousand million years. But there is a quicker way to find out what will happen: jump into a black
  2808. hole. The collapse of a star to form a black hole is rather like the later stages of the collapse of the whole
  2809. universe. So if disorder were to decrease in the contracting phase of the universe, one might also expect it to
  2810. decrease inside a black hole. So perhaps an astronaut who fell into a black hole would be able to make money
  2811. at roulette by remembering where the ball went before he placed his bet. (Unfortunately, however, he would not
  2812. have long to play before he was turned to spaghetti. Nor would he be able to let us know about the reversal of
  2813. the thermodynamic arrow, or even bank his winnings, because he would be trapped behind the event horizon
  2814. of the black hole.)
  2815. At first, I believed that disorder would decrease when the universe recollapsed. This was because I thought that
  2816. the universe had to return to a smooth and ordered state when it became small again. This would mean that
  2817. the contracting phase would be like the time reverse of the expanding phase. People in the contracting phase
  2818. would live their lives backward: they would die before they were born and get younger as the universe
  2819. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 9
  2820. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/h.html (3 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:38 AM]
  2821. contracted.
  2822. This idea is attractive because it would mean a nice symmetry between the expanding and contracting phases.
  2823. However, one cannot adopt it on its own, independent of other ideas about the universe. The question is: is it
  2824. implied by the no boundary condition, or is it inconsistent with that condition? As I said, I thought at first that the
  2825. no boundary condition did indeed imply that disorder would decrease in the contracting phase. I was misled
  2826. partly by the analogy with the surface of the earth. If one took the beginning of the universe to correspond to
  2827. the North Pole, then the end of the universe should be similar to the beginning, just as the South Pole is similar
  2828. to the North. However, the North and South Poles correspond to the beginning and end of the universe in
  2829. imaginary time. The beginning and end in real time can be very different from each other. I was also misled by
  2830. work I had done on a simple model of the universe in which the collapsing phase looked like the time reverse of
  2831. the expanding phase. However, a colleague of mine, Don Page, of Penn State University, pointed out that the
  2832. no boundary condition did not require the contracting phase necessarily to be the time reverse of the expanding
  2833. phase. Further, one of my students, Raymond Laflamme, found that in a slightly more complicated model, the
  2834. collapse of the universe was very different from the expansion. I realized that I had made a mistake: the no
  2835. boundary condition implied that disorder would in fact continue to increase during the contraction. The
  2836. thermodynamic and psychological arrows of time would not reverse when the universe begins to recontract, or
  2837. inside black holes.
  2838. What should you do when you find you have made a mistake like that? Some people never admit that they are
  2839. wrong and continue to find new, and often mutually inconsistent, arguments to support their case – as
  2840. Eddington did in opposing black hole theory. Others claim to have never really supported the incorrect view in
  2841. the first place or, if they did, it was only to show that it was inconsistent. It seems to me much better and less
  2842. confusing if you admit in print that you were wrong. A good example of this was Einstein, who called the
  2843. cosmological constant, which he introduced when he was trying to make a static model of the universe, the
  2844. biggest mistake of his life.
  2845. To return to the arrow of time, there remains the question: why do we observe that the thermodynamic and
  2846. cosmological arrows point in the same direction? Or in other words, why does disorder increase in the same
  2847. direction of time as that in which the universe expands? If one believes that the universe will expand and then
  2848. contract again, as the no boundary proposal seems to imply, this becomes a question of why we should be in
  2849. the expanding phase rather than the contracting phase.
  2850. One can answer this on the basis of the weak anthropic principle. Conditions in the contracting phase would not
  2851. be suitable for the existence of intelligent beings who could ask the question: why is disorder increasing in the
  2852. same direction of time as that in which the universe is expanding? The inflation in the early stages of the
  2853. universe, which the no boundary proposal predicts, means that the universe must be expanding at very close to
  2854. the critical rate at which it would just avoid recollapse, and so will not recollapse for a very long time. By then all
  2855. the stars will have burned out and the protons and neutrons in them will probably have decayed into light
  2856. particles and radiation. The universe would be in a state of almost complete disorder. There would be no strong
  2857. thermodynamic arrow of time. Disorder couldn’t increase much because the universe would be in a state of
  2858. almost complete disorder already. However, a strong thermodynamic arrow is necessary for intelligent life to
  2859. operate. In order to survive, human beings have to consume food, which is an ordered form of energy, and
  2860. convert it into heat, which is a disordered form of energy. Thus intelligent life could not exist in the contracting
  2861. phase of the universe. This is the explanation of why we observe that the thermodynamic and cosmological
  2862. arrows of time point in the same direction. It is not that the expansion of the universe causes disorder to
  2863. increase. Rather, it is that the no boundary condition causes disorder to increase and the conditions to be
  2864. suitable for intelligent life only in the expanding phase.
  2865. To summarize, the laws of science do not distinguish between the forward and backward directions of time.
  2866. However, there are at least three arrows of time that do distinguish the past from the future. They are the
  2867. thermodynamic arrow, the direction of time in which disorder increases; the psychological arrow, the direction
  2868. of time in which we remember the past and not the future; and the cosmological arrow, the direction of time in
  2869. which the universe expands rather than contracts. I have shown that the psychological arrow is essentially the
  2870. same as the thermodynamic arrow, so that the two would always point in the same direction. The no boundary
  2871. proposal for the universe predicts the existence of a well-defined thermodynamic arrow of time because the
  2872. universe must start off in a smooth and ordered state. And the reason we observe this thermodynamic arrow to
  2873. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 9
  2874. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/h.html (4 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:38 AM]
  2875. agree with the cosmological arrow is that intelligent beings can exist only in the expanding phase. The
  2876. contracting phase will be unsuitable because it has no strong thermodynamic arrow of time.
  2877. The progress of the human race in understanding the universe has established a small corner of order in an
  2878. increasingly disordered universe. If you remember every word in this book, your memory will have recorded
  2879. about two million pieces of information: the order in your brain will have increased by about two million units.
  2880. However, while you have been reading the book, you will have converted at least a thousand calories of
  2881. ordered energy, in the form of food, into disordered energy, in the form of heat that you lose to the air around
  2882. you by convection and sweat. This will increase the disorder of the universe by about twenty million million
  2883. million million units – or about ten million million million times the increase in order in your brain – and that’s if
  2884. you remember everything in this book. In the next chapter but one I will try to increase the order in our neck of
  2885. the woods a little further by explaining how people are trying to fit together the partial theories I have described
  2886. to form a complete unified theory that would cover everything in the universe.
  2887. PREVIOUS NEXT
  2888. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 9
  2889. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/h.html (5 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:38 AM]
  2890. CHAPTER 10
  2891. WORMHOLES AND TIME TRAVEL
  2892. The last chapter discussed why we see time go forward: why disorder increases and why we remember the
  2893. past but not the future. Time was treated as if it were a straight railway line on which one could only go one way
  2894. or the other.
  2895. But what if the railway line had loops and branches so that a train could keep going forward but come back to a
  2896. station it had already passed? In other words, might it be possible for someone to travel into the future or the
  2897. past?
  2898. H. G. Wells in The Time Machine explored these possibilities as have countless other writers of science fiction.
  2899. Yet many of the ideas of science fiction, like submarines and travel to the moon, have become matters of
  2900. science fact. So what are the prospects for time travel?
  2901. The first indication that the laws of physics might really allow people to travel in time came in 1949 when Kurt
  2902. Godel discovered a new space-time allowed by general relativity. Godel was a mathematician who was famous
  2903. for proving that it is impossible to prove all true statements, even if you limit yourself to trying to prove all the
  2904. true statements in a subject as apparently cut and dried as arithmetic. Like the uncertainty principle, Godel’s
  2905. incompleteness theorem may be a fundamental limitation on our ability to understand and predict the universe,
  2906. but so far at least it hasn’t seemed to be an obstacle in our search for a complete unified theory.
  2907. Godel got to know about general relativity when he and Einstein spent their later years at the Institute for
  2908. Advanced Study in Princeton. His space-time had the curious property that the whole universe was rotating.
  2909. One might ask: “Rotating with respect to what?” The answer is that distant matter would be rotating with
  2910. respect to directions that little tops or gyroscopes point in.
  2911. This had the side effect that it would be possible for someone to go off in a rocket ship and return to earth
  2912. before he set out. This property really upset Einstein, who had thought that general relativity wouldn’t allow time
  2913. travel. However, given Einstein’s record of ill-founded opposition to gravitational collapse and the uncertainty
  2914. principle, maybe this was an encouraging sign. The solution Godel found doesn’t correspond to the universe
  2915. we live in because we can show that the universe is not rotating. It also had a non-zero value of the
  2916. cosmological constant that Einstein introduced when he thought the universe was unchanging. After Hubble
  2917. discovered the expansion of the universe, there was no need for a cosmological constant and it is now
  2918. generally believed to be zero. However, other more reasonable space-times that are allowed by general
  2919. relativity and which permit travel into the past have since been found. One is in the interior of a rotating black
  2920. hole. Another is a space-time that contains two cosmic strings moving past each other at high speed. As their
  2921. name suggests, cosmic strings are objects that are like string in that they have length but a tiny cross section.
  2922. Actually, they are more like rubber bands because they are under enormous tension, something like a million
  2923. million million million tons. A cosmic string attached to the earth could accelerate it from 0 to 60 mph in 1/30th
  2924. of a second. Cosmic strings may sound like pure science fiction but there are reasons to believe they could
  2925. have formed in the early universe as a result of symmetry-breaking of the kind discussed in Chapter 5.
  2926. Because they would be under enormous tension and could start in any configuration, they might accelerate to
  2927. very high speeds when they straighten out.
  2928. The Godel solution and the cosmic string space-time start out so distorted that travel into the past was always
  2929. possible. God might have created such a warped universe but we have no reason to believe he did.
  2930. Observations of the microwave background and of the abundances of the light elements indicate that the early
  2931. universe did not have the kind of curvature required to allow time travel. The same conclusion follows on
  2932. theoretical grounds if the no boundary proposal is correct. So the question is: if the universe starts out without
  2933. the kind of curvature required for time travel, can we subsequently warp local regions of space-time sufficiently
  2934. to allow it?
  2935. A closely related problem that is also of concern to writers of science fiction is rapid interstellar or intergalactic
  2936. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 10
  2937. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/i.html (1 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:45 AM]
  2938. travel. According to relativity, nothing can travel faster than light. If we therefore sent a spaceship to our nearest
  2939. neighboring star, Alpha Centauri, which is about four light-years away, it would take at least eight years before
  2940. we could expect the travelers to return and tell us what they had found. If the expedition were to the center of
  2941. our galaxy, it would be at least a hundred thousand years before it came back. The theory of relativity does
  2942. allow one consolation. This is the so-called twins paradox mentioned in Chapter 2.
  2943. Because there is no unique standard of time, but rather observers each have their own time as measured by
  2944. clocks that they carry with them, it is possible for the journey to seem to be much shorter for the space travelers
  2945. than for those who remain on earth. But there would not be much joy in returning from a space voyage a few
  2946. years older to find that everyone you had left behind was dead and gone thousands of years ago. So in order to
  2947. have any human interest in their stories, science fiction writers had to suppose that we would one day discover
  2948. how to travel faster than light. What most of thee authors don’t seem to have realized is that if you can travel
  2949. faster than light, the theory of relativity implies you can also travel back in the, as the following limerick says:
  2950. There was a young lady of Wight
  2951. Who traveled much faster than light.
  2952. She departed one day,
  2953. In a relative way,
  2954. And arrived on the previous night
  2955. The point is that the theory of relativity says hat there is no unique measure of time that all observers will agree
  2956. on Rather, each observer has his or her own measure of time. If it is possible for a rocket traveling below the
  2957. speed of light to get from event A (say, the final of the 100-meter race of the Olympic Games in 202) to event B
  2958. (say, the opening of the 100,004th meeting of the Congress of Alpha Centauri), then all observers will agree
  2959. that event A happened before event B according to their times. Suppose, however, that the spaceship would
  2960. have to travel faster than light to carry the news of the race to the Congress. Then observers moving at
  2961. different speeds can disagree about whether event A occurred before B or vice versa. According to the time of
  2962. an observer who is at rest with respect to the earth, it may be that the Congress opened after the race. Thus
  2963. this observer would think that a spaceship could get from A to B in time if only it could ignore the speed-of-light
  2964. speed limit. However, to an observer at Alpha Centauri moving away from the earth at nearly the speed of light,
  2965. it would appear that event B, the opening of the Congress, would occur before event A, the 100-meter race.
  2966. The theory of relativity says that the laws of physics appear the same to observers moving at different speeds.
  2967. This has been well tested by experiment and is likely to remain a feature even if we find a more advanced
  2968. theory to replace relativity Thus the moving observer would say that if faster-than-light travel is possible, it
  2969. should be possible to get from event B, the opening of the Congress, to event A, the 100-meter race. If one
  2970. went slightly faster, one could even get back before the race and place a bet on it in the sure knowledge that
  2971. one would win.
  2972. There is a problem with breaking the speed-of-light barrier. The theory of relativity says that the rocket power
  2973. needed to accelerate a spaceship gets greater and greater the nearer it gets to the speed of light. We have
  2974. experimental evidence for this, not with spaceships but with elementary particles in particle accelerators like
  2975. those at Fermilab or CERN (European Centre for Nuclear Research). We can accelerate particles to 99.99
  2976. percent of the speed of light, but however much power we feed in, we can’t get them beyond the speed-of-light
  2977. barrier. Similarly with spaceships: no matter how much rocket power they have, they can’t accelerate beyond
  2978. the speed of light.
  2979. That might seem to rule out both rapid space travel and travel back in time. However, there is a possible way
  2980. out. It might be that one could warp space-time so that there was a shortcut between A and B One way of doing
  2981. this would be to create a wormhole between A and B. As its name suggests, a wormhole is a thin tube of
  2982. space-time which can connect two nearly flat regions far apart.
  2983. There need be no relation between the distance through the wormhole and the separation of its ends in the
  2984. nearly Hat background. Thus one could imagine that one could create or find a wormhole that world lead from
  2985. the vicinity of the Solar System to Alpha Centauri. The distance through the wormhole might be only a few
  2986. million miles even though earth and Alpha Centauri are twenty million million miles apart in ordinary space. This
  2987. would allow news of the 100-meter race to reach the opening of the Congress. But then an observer moving
  2988. toward 6e earth should also be able to find another wormhole that would enable him to get from the opening of
  2989. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 10
  2990. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/i.html (2 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:45 AM]
  2991. the Congress on Alpha Centauri back to earth before the start of the race. So wormholes, like any other
  2992. possible form of travel faster than light, would allow one to travel into the past.
  2993. The idea of wormholes between different regions of space-time was not an invention of science fiction writers
  2994. but came from a very respectable source.
  2995. In 1935, Einstein and Nathan Rosen wrote a paper in which they showed that general relativity allowed what
  2996. they called “bridges,” but which are now known as wormholes. The Einstein-Rosen bridges didn’t last long
  2997. enough for a spaceship to get through: the ship would run into a singularity as the wormhole pinched off.
  2998. However, it has been suggested that it might be possible for an advanced civilization to keep a wormhole open.
  2999. To do this, or to warp space-time in any other way so as to permit time travel, one can show that one needs a
  3000. region of space-time with negative curvature, like the surface of a saddle. Ordi-nary matter, which has a
  3001. positive energy density, gives space-time a positive curvature, like the surface of a sphere. So what one needs,
  3002. in order to warp space-time in a way that will allow travel into the past, is matter with negative energy density.
  3003. Energy is a bit like money: if you have a positive balance, you can distribute it in various ways, but according to
  3004. the classical laws that were believed at the beginning of the century, you weren’t allowed to be overdrawn. So
  3005. these classical laws would have ruled out any possibility of time travel. However, as has been described in
  3006. earlier chapters, the classical laws were superseded by quantum laws based on the uncertainty principle. The
  3007. quantum laws are more liberal and allow you to be overdrawn on one or two accounts provided the total
  3008. balance is positive. In other words, quantum theory allows the energy density to be negative in some places,
  3009. provided that this is made up for by positive energy densities in other places, so that the total energy re-mains
  3010. positive. An example of how quantum theory can allow negative energy densities is provided by what is called
  3011. the Casimir effect. As we saw in Chapter 7, even what we think of as “empty” space is filled with pairs of virtual
  3012. particles and antiparticles that appear together, move apart, and come back together and annihilate each other.
  3013. Now, suppose one has two parallel metal plates a short distance apart. The plates will act like mirrors for the
  3014. virtual photons or particles of light. In fact they will form a cavity between them, a bit like an organ pipe that will
  3015. resonate only at certain notes. This means that virtual photons can occur in the space between the plates only
  3016. if their wavelengths (the distance between the crest of one wave and the next) fit a whole number of times into
  3017. the gap between the plates. If the width of a cavity is a whole number of wavelengths plus a fraction of a
  3018. wave-length, then after some reflections backward and forward between the plates, the crests of one wave will
  3019. coincide with the troughs of another and the waves will cancel out.
  3020. Because the virtual photons between the plates can have only the resonant wavelengths, there will be slightly
  3021. fewer of them than in the region outside the plates where virtual photons can have any wavelength. Thus there
  3022. will be slightly fewer virtual photons hitting the inside surfaces of the plates than the outside surfaces. One
  3023. would therefore expect a force on the plates, pushing them toward each other. This force has actually been
  3024. detected and has the predicted value. Thus we have experimental evidence that virtual particles exist and have
  3025. real effects.
  3026. The fact that there are fewer virtual photons between the plates means that their energy density will be less
  3027. than elsewhere. But the total energy density in “empty” space far away from the plates must be zero, because
  3028. otherwise the energy density would warp the space and it would not be almost flat. So, if the energy density
  3029. between the plates is less than the energy density far away, it must be negative.
  3030. We thus have experimental evidence both that space-time can be warped (from the bending of light during
  3031. eclipses) and that it can be curved in the way necessary to allow time travel (from the Casimir effect). One
  3032. might hope therefore that as we advance in science and technology, we would eventually manage to build a
  3033. time machine. But if so, why hasn’t anyone come back from the future and told us how to do it? There might be
  3034. good reasons why it would be unwise to give us the secret of time travel at our present primitive state of
  3035. development, but unless human nature changes radically, it is difficult to believe that some visitor from the
  3036. future wouldn’t spill the beans. Of course, some people would claim that sightings of UFOs are evidence that
  3037. we are being visited either by aliens or by people from the future. (If the aliens were to get here in reasonable
  3038. time, they would need faster-than-light travel, so the two possibilities may be equivalent.)
  3039. However, I think that any visit by aliens or people from the future would be much more obvious and, probably,
  3040. much more unpleasant. If they are going to reveal themselves at all, why do so only to those who are not
  3041. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 10
  3042. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/i.html (3 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:45 AM]
  3043. regarded as reliable witnesses? If they are trying to warn us of some great danger, they are not being very
  3044. effective.
  3045. A possible way to explain the absence of visitors from the future would be to say that the past is fixed because
  3046. we have observed it and seen that it does not have the kind of warping needed to allow travel back from the
  3047. future. On the other hand, the future is unknown and open, so it might well have the curvature required. This
  3048. would mean that any time travel would be confined to the future. There would be no chance of Captain Kirk and
  3049. the Starship Enterprise turning up at the present time.
  3050. This might explain why we have not yet been overrun by tourists from the future, but it would not avoid the
  3051. problems that would arise if one were able to go back and change history. Suppose, for example, you went
  3052. back and killed your great-great-grandfather while he was still a child. There are many versions of this paradox
  3053. but they are essentially equivalent: one would get contradictions if one were free to change the past.
  3054. There seem to be two possible resolutions to the paradoxes posed by time travel. One I shall call the consistent
  3055. histories approach. It says that even if space-time is warped so that it would be possible to travel into the past,
  3056. what happens in space-time must be a consistent solution of the laws of physics. According to this viewpoint,
  3057. you could not go back in time unless history showed that you had already arrived in the past and, while there,
  3058. had not killed your great-great-grandfather or committed any other acts that would conflict with your current
  3059. situation in the present. Moreover, when you did go back, you wouldn’t be able to change recorded history.
  3060. That means you wouldn’t have free will to do what you wanted. Of course, one could say that free will is an
  3061. illusion anyway. If there really is a complete unified theory that governs everything, it presumably also
  3062. determines your actions. But it does so in a way that is impossible to calculate for an organism that is as
  3063. complicated as a human being. The reason we say that humans have free will is because we can’t predict what
  3064. they will do. However, if the human then goes off in a rocket ship and comes back before he or she set off, we
  3065. will be able to predict what he or she will do because it will be part of recorded history. Thus, in that situation,
  3066. the time traveler would have no free will.
  3067. The other possible way to resolve the paradoxes of time travel might be called the alternative histories
  3068. hypothesis. The idea here is that when time travelers go back to the past, they enter alternative histories which
  3069. differ from recorded history. Thus they can act freely, without the constraint of consistency with their previous
  3070. history. Steven Spiel-berg had fun with this notion in the Back to the Future films: Marty McFly was able to go
  3071. back and change his parents’ courtship to a more satisfactory history.
  3072. The alternative histories hypothesis sounds rather like Richard Feynman’s way of expressing quantum theory
  3073. as a sum over histories, which was described in Chapters 4 and 8. This said that the universe didn’t just have a
  3074. single history: rather it had every possible history, each with its own probability. However, there seems to be an
  3075. important difference between Feynman’s proposal and alternative histories. In Feynman’s sum, each history
  3076. comprises a complete space-time and everything in it. The space-time may be so warped that it is possible to
  3077. travel in a rocket into the past. But the rocket would remain in the same space-time and therefore the same
  3078. history, which would have to be consistent. Thus Feynman’s sum over histories proposal seems to support the
  3079. consistent histories hypothesis rather than the alternative histories.
  3080. The Feynman sum over histories does allow travel into the past on a microscopic scale. In Chapter 9 we saw
  3081. that the laws of science are unchanged by combinations of the operations C, P, and T. This means that an
  3082. antiparticle spinning in the anticlockwise direction and moving from A to B can also be viewed as an ordinary
  3083. particle spinning clockwise and moving backward in time from B to A. Similarly, an ordinary particle moving
  3084. forward in time is equivalent to an antiparticle moving backward in time. As has been discussed in this chapter
  3085. and Chapter 7, “empty” space is filled with pairs of virtual particles and antiparticles that appear together, move
  3086. apart, and then come back together and annihilate each other.
  3087. So, one can regard the pair of particles as a single particle moving on a closed loop in space-time. When the
  3088. pair is moving forward in time (from the event at which it appears to that at which it annihilates), it is called a
  3089. particle. But when the particle is traveling back in time (from the event at which the pair annihilates to that at
  3090. which it appears), it is said to be an antiparticle traveling forward in time.
  3091. The explanation of how black holes can emit particles and radiation (given in Chapter 7) was that one member
  3092. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 10
  3093. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/i.html (4 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:45 AM]
  3094. of a virtual particle/ antiparticle pair (say, the antiparticle) might fall into the black hole, leaving the other
  3095. member without a partner with which to annihilate. The forsaken particle might fall into the hole as well, but it
  3096. might also escape from the vicinity of the black hole. If so, to an observer at a distance it would appear to be a
  3097. particle emitted by the black hole.
  3098. One can, however, have a different but equivalent intuitive picture of the mechanism for emission from black
  3099. holes. One can regard the member of the virtual pair that fell into the black hole (say, the antiparticle) as a
  3100. particle traveling backward in time out of the hole. When it gets to the point at which the virtual
  3101. particle/antiparticle pair appeared together, it is scattered by the gravitational field into a particle traveling
  3102. forward in time and escaping from the black hole. If, instead, it were the particle member of the virtual pair that
  3103. fell into the hole, one could regard it as an antiparticle traveling back in time and coming out of the black hole.
  3104. Thus the radiation by black holes shows that quantum theory allows travel back in time on a microscopic scale
  3105. and that such time travel can produce observable effects.
  3106. One can therefore ask: does quantum theory allow time travel on a macroscopic scale, which people could
  3107. use? At first sight, it seems it should. The Feynman sum over histories proposal is supposed to be over all
  3108. histories. Thus it should include histories in which space-time is so warped that it is possible to travel into the
  3109. past. Why then aren’t we in trouble with history? Suppose, for example, someone had gone back and given the
  3110. Nazis the secret of the atom bomb?
  3111. One would avoid these problems if what I call the chronology protection conjecture holds. This says that the
  3112. laws of physics conspire to prevent macroscopic bodies from carrying information into the past. Like the cosmic
  3113. censorship conjecture, it has not been proved but there are reasons to believe it is true.
  3114. The reason to believe that chronology protection operates is that when space-time is warped enough to make
  3115. travel into the past possible, virtual particles moving on closed loops in space-time can become real particles
  3116. traveling forward in time at or below the speed of light. As these particles can go round the loop any number of
  3117. times, they pass each point on their route many times. Thus their energy is counted over and over again and
  3118. the energy density will become very large. This could give space-time a positive curvature that would not allow
  3119. travel into the past. It is not yet clear whether these particles would cause positive or negative curvature or
  3120. whether the curvature produced by some kinds of virtual particles might cancel that produced by other kinds.
  3121. Thus the possibility of time travel remains open. But I’m not going to bet on it. My opponent might have the
  3122. unfair advantage of knowing the future.
  3123. PREVIOUS NEXT
  3124. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 10
  3125. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/i.html (5 of 5) [2/20/2001 3:15:45 AM]
  3126. CHAPTER 11
  3127. THE UNIFICATION OF PHYSICS
  3128. As was explained in the first chapter, it would be very difficult to construct a complete unified theory of
  3129. everything in the universe all at one go. So instead we have made progress by finding partial theories that
  3130. describe a limited range of happenings and by neglecting other effects or approximating them by certain
  3131. numbers. (Chemistry, for example, allows us to calculate the interactions of atoms, without knowing the internal
  3132. structure of an atom’s nucleus.) Ultimately, however, one would hope to find a complete, consistent, unified
  3133. theory that would include all these partial theories as approximations, and that did not need to be adjusted to fit
  3134. the facts by picking the values of certain arbitrary numbers in the theory. The quest for such a theory is known
  3135. as “the unification of physics.” Einstein spent most of his later years unsuccessfully searching for a unified
  3136. theory, but the time was not ripe: there were partial theories for gravity and the electromagnetic force, but very
  3137. little was known about the nuclear forces. Moreover, Einstein refused to believe in the reality of quantum
  3138. mechanics, despite the important role he had played in its development. Yet it seems that the uncertainty
  3139. principle is a fundamental feature of the universe we live in. A successful unified theory must, therefore,
  3140. necessarily incorporate this principle.
  3141. As I shall describe, the prospects for finding such a theory seem to be much better now because we know so
  3142. much more about the universe. But we must beware of overconfidence – we have had false dawns before! At
  3143. the beginning of this century, for example, it was thought that everything could be explained in terms of the
  3144. properties of continuous matter, such as elasticity and heat conduction. The discovery of atomic structure and
  3145. the uncertainty principle put an emphatic end to that. Then again, in 1928, physicist and Nobel Prize winner
  3146. Max Born told a group of visitors to Gottingen University, “Physics, as we know it, will be over in six months.”
  3147. His confidence was based on the recent discovery by Dirac of the equation that governed the electron. It was
  3148. thought that a similar equation would govern the proton, which was the only other particle known at the time,
  3149. and that would be the end of theoretical physics. However, the discovery of the neutron and of nuclear forces
  3150. knocked that one on the head too. Having said this, I still believe there are grounds for cautious optimism that
  3151. we may now be near the end of the search for the ultimate laws of nature.
  3152. In previous chapters I have described general relativity, the partial theory of gravity, and the partial theories that
  3153. govern the weak, the strong, and the electromagnetic forces. The last three may be combined in so-called
  3154. grand unified theories, or GUTs, which are not very satisfactory because they do not include gravity and
  3155. because they contain a number of quantities, like the relative masses of different particles, that cannot be
  3156. predicted from the theory but have to be chosen to fit observations. The main difficulty in finding a theory that
  3157. unifies gravity with the other forces is that general relativity is a “classical” theory; that is, it does not incorporate
  3158. the uncertainty principle of quantum mechanics. On the other hand, the other partial theories depend on
  3159. quantum mechanics in an essential way. A necessary first step, therefore, is to combine general relativity with
  3160. the uncertainty principle. As we have seen, this can produce some remarkable consequences, such as black
  3161. holes not being black, and the universe not having any singularities but being completely self-contained and
  3162. without a boundary. The trouble is, as explained in Chapter 7, that the uncertainty principle means that even
  3163. “empty” space is filled with pairs of virtual particles and antiparticles. These pairs would have an infinite amount
  3164. of energy and, therefore, by Einstein’s famous equation E = mc2, they would have an infinite amount of mass.
  3165. Their gravitational attraction would thus curve up the universe to infinitely small size.
  3166. Rather similar, seemingly absurd infinities occur in the other partial theories, but in all these cases the infinities
  3167. can be canceled out by a process called renormalization. This involves canceling the infinities by introducing
  3168. other infinities. Although this technique is rather dubious mathematically, it does seem to work in practice, and
  3169. has been used with these theories to make predictions that agree with observations to an extraordinary degree
  3170. of accuracy. Renormalization, however, does have a serious drawback from the point of view of trying to find a
  3171. complete theory, because it means that the actual values of the masses and the strengths of the forces cannot
  3172. be predicted from the theory, but have to be chosen to fit the observations.
  3173. In attempting to incorporate the uncertainty principle into general relativity, one has only two quantities that can
  3174. be adjusted: the strength of gravity and the value of the cosmological constant. But adjusting these is not
  3175. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3176. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (1 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3177. sufficient to remove all the infinities. One therefore has a theory that seems to predict that certain quantities,
  3178. such as the curvature of space-time, are really infinite, yet these quantities can be observed and measured to
  3179. be perfectly finite! This problem in combining general relativity and the uncertainty principle had been
  3180. suspected for some time, but was finally confirmed by detailed calculations in 1972. Four years later, a possible
  3181. solution, called “supergravity,” was suggested. The idea was to combine the spin-2 particle called the graviton,
  3182. which carries the gravitational force, with certain other particles of spin 3/2, 1, ½, and 0. In a sense, all these
  3183. particles could then be regarded as different aspects of the same “superparticle,” thus unifying the matter
  3184. particles with spin ½ and 3/2 with the force-carrying particles of spin 0, 1, and 2. The virtual particle/antiparticle
  3185. pairs of spin ½ and 3/2 would have negative energy, and so would tend to cancel out the positive energy of the
  3186. spin 2, 1, and 0 virtual pairs. This would cause many of the possible infinities to cancel out, but it was
  3187. suspected that some infinities might still remain. However, the calculations required to find out whether or not
  3188. there were any infinities left uncancelled were so long and difficult that no one was prepared to undertake them.
  3189. Even with a computer it was reckoned it would take at least four years, and the chances were very high that
  3190. one would make at least one mistake, probably more. So one would know one had the right answer only if
  3191. someone else repeated the calculation and got the same answer, and that did not seem very likely!
  3192. Despite these problems, and the fact that the particles in the super-gravity theories did not seem to match the
  3193. observed particles, most scientists believed that supergravity was probably the right answer to the problem of
  3194. the unification of physics. It seemed the best way of unifying gravity with the other forces. However, in 1984
  3195. there was a remarkable change of opinion in favor of what are called string theories. In these theories the basic
  3196. objects are not particles, which occupy a single point of space, but things that have a length but no other
  3197. dimension, like an infinitely thin piece of string. These strings may have ends (the so-called open strings) or
  3198. they may be joined up with themselves in closed loops (closed strings) Figure 11:1 and Figure 11:2.
  3199. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3200. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (2 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3201. Figures 11:1 & 11:2
  3202. A particle occupies one point of space at each instant of time. Thus its history can be represented by a line in
  3203. space-time (the “world-line”). A string, on the other hand, occupies a line in space at each moment of time. So
  3204. its history in space-time is a two-dimensional surface called the world-sheet. (Any point on such a world-sheet
  3205. can be described by two numbers, one specifying the time and the other the position of the point on the string.)
  3206. The world-sheet of an open string is a strip: its edges represent the paths through space-time of the ends of the
  3207. string Figure 11:1. The world-sheet of a closed string is a cylinder or tube Figure 11:2: a slice through the tube
  3208. is a circle, which represents the position of the string at one particular time.
  3209. Two pieces of string can join together to form a single string; in the case of open strings they simply join at the
  3210. ends Figure 11:3, while in the case of closed strings it is like the two legs joining on a pair of trousers Figure
  3211. 11:4.
  3212. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3213. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (3 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3214. Figure 11:3
  3215. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3216. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (4 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3217. Figure 11:4
  3218. Similarly, a single piece of string can divide into two strings. In string theories, what were previously thought of
  3219. as particles are now pictured as waves traveling down the string, like waves on a vibrating kite string. The
  3220. emission or absorption of one particle by another corresponds to the dividing or joining together of strings. For
  3221. example, the gravitational force of the sun on the earth was pictured in particle theories as being caused by the
  3222. emission of a graviton by a particle in the sun and its absorption by a particle in the earth Figure 11:5.
  3223. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3224. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (5 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3225. Figures 11:5 & 11:6
  3226. In string theory, this process corresponds to an H-shaped tube or pipe Figure 11:6 (string theory is rather like
  3227. plumbing, in a way). The two vertical sides of the H correspond to the particles in the sun and the earth, and the
  3228. horizontal crossbar corresponds to the graviton that travels between them.
  3229. String theory has a curious history. It was originally invented in the late 1960s in an attempt to find a theory to
  3230. describe the strong force. The idea was that particles like the proton and the neutron could be regarded as
  3231. waves on a string. The strong forces between the particles would correspond to pieces of string that went
  3232. between other bits of string, as in a spider’s web. For this theory to give the observed value of the strong force
  3233. between particles, the strings had to be like rubber bands with a pull of about ten tons.
  3234. In 1974 Joel Scherk from Paris and John Schwarz from the California Institute of Technology published a paper
  3235. in which they showed that string theory could describe the gravitational force, but only if the tension in the string
  3236. were very much higher, about a thousand million million million million million million tons (1 with thirty-nine
  3237. zeros after it). The predictions of the string theory would be just the same as those of general relativity on
  3238. normal length scales, but they would differ at very small distances, less than a thousand million million million
  3239. million millionth of a centimeter (a centimeter divided by 1 with thirty-three zeros after it). Their work did not
  3240. receive much attention, however, because at just about that time most people abandoned the original string
  3241. theory of the strong force in favor of the theory based on quarks and gluons, which seemed to fit much better
  3242. with observations. Scherk died in tragic circumstances (he suffered from diabetes and went into a coma when
  3243. no one was around to give him an injection of insulin). So Schwarz was left alone as almost the only supporter
  3244. of string theory, but now with the much higher proposed value of the string tension.
  3245. In 1984 interest in strings suddenly revived, apparently for two reasons. One was that people were not really
  3246. making much progress toward showing that supergravity was finite or that it could explain the kinds of particles
  3247. that we observe. The other was the publication of a paper by John Schwarz and Mike Green of Queen Mary
  3248. College, London, that showed that string theory might be able to explain the existence of particles that have a
  3249. built-in left-handedness, like some of the particles that we observe. Whatever the reasons, a large number of
  3250. people soon began to work on string theory and a new version was developed, the so-called heterotic string,
  3251. which seemed as if it might be able to explain the types of particles that we observe.
  3252. String theories also lead to infinities, but it is thought they will all cancel out in versions like the heterotic string
  3253. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3254. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (6 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3255. (though this is not yet known for certain). String theories, however, have a bigger problem: they seem to be
  3256. consistent only if space-time has either ten or twenty-six dimensions, instead of the usual four! Of course, extra
  3257. space-time dimensions are a commonplace of science fiction indeed, they provide an ideal way of overcoming
  3258. the normal restriction of general relativity that one cannot travel faster than light or back in time (see Chapter
  3259. 10). The idea is to take a shortcut through the extra dimensions. One can picture this in the following way.
  3260. Imagine that the space we live in has only two dimensions and is curved like the surface of an anchor ring or
  3261. torus Figure 11:7.
  3262. Figure 11:7
  3263. If you were on one side of the inside edge of the ring and you wanted to get to a point on the other side, you
  3264. would have to go round the inner edge of the ring. However, if you were able to travel in the third dimension,
  3265. you could cut straight across.
  3266. Why don’t we notice all these extra dimensions, if they are really there? Why do we see only three space
  3267. dimensions and one time dimension? The suggestion is that the other dimensions are curved up into a space of
  3268. very small size, something like a million million million million millionth of an inch. This is so small that we just
  3269. don’t notice it: we see only one time dimension and three space dimensions, in which space-time is fairly flat. It
  3270. is like the surface of a straw. If you look at it closely, you see it is two-dimensional (the position of a point on the
  3271. straw is described by two numbers, the length along the straw and the distance round the circular direction).
  3272. But if you look at it from a distance, you don’t see the thickness of the straw and it looks one-dimensional (the
  3273. position of a point is specified only by the length along the straw). So it is with space-time: on a very small scale
  3274. it is ten-dimensional and highly curved, but on bigger scales you don’t see the curvature or the extra
  3275. dimensions. If this picture is correct, it spells bad news for would-be space travelers: the extra dimensions
  3276. would be far too small to allow a spaceship through. However, it raises another major problem. Why should
  3277. some, but not all, of the dimensions be curled up into a small ball? Presumably, in the very early universe all
  3278. the dimensions would have been very curved. Why did one time dimension and three space dimensions flatten
  3279. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3280. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (7 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3281. out, while the other dimensions remain tightly curled up?
  3282. One possible answer is the anthropic principle. Two space dimensions do not seem to be enough to allow for
  3283. the development of complicated beings like us. For example, two-dimensional animals living on a
  3284. one-dimensional earth would have to climb over each other in order to get past each other. If a two-dimensional
  3285. creature ate something it could not digest completely, it would have to bring up the remains the same way it
  3286. swallowed them, because if there were a passage right through its body, it would divide the creature into two
  3287. separate halves: our two-dimensional being would fall apart Figure 11:8. Similarly, it is difficult to see how there
  3288. could be any circulation of the blood in a two-dimensional creature.
  3289. Figure 11:8
  3290. There would also be problems with more than three space dimensions. The gravitational force between two
  3291. bodies would decrease more rapidly with distance than it does in three dimensions. (In three dimensions, the
  3292. gravitational force drops to 1/4 if one doubles the distance. In four dimensions it would drop to 1/5, in five
  3293. dimensions to 1/6, and so on.) The significance of this is that the orbits of planets, like the earth, around the sun
  3294. would be unstable: the least disturbance from a circular orbit (such as would be caused by the gravitational
  3295. attraction of other planets) would result in the earth spiraling away from or into the sun. We would either freeze
  3296. or be burned up. In fact, the same behavior of gravity with distance in more than three space dimensions
  3297. means that the sun would not be able to exist in a stable state with pressure balancing gravity. It would either
  3298. fall apart or it would collapse to form a black hole. In either case, it would not be of much use as a source of
  3299. heat and light for life on earth. On a smaller scale, the electrical forces that cause the electrons to orbit round
  3300. the nucleus in an atom would behave in the same way as gravitational forces. Thus the electrons would either
  3301. escape from the atom altogether or would spiral into the nucleus. In either case, one could not have atoms as
  3302. we know them.
  3303. It seems clear then that life, at least as we know it, can exist only in regions of space-time in which one time
  3304. dimension and three space dimensions are not curled up small. This would mean that one could appeal to the
  3305. weak anthropic principle, provided one could show that string theory does at least allow there to be such
  3306. regions of the universe – and it seems that indeed string theory does. There may well be other regions of the
  3307. universe, or other universes (whatever that may mean), in which all the dimensions are curled up small or in
  3308. which more than four dimensions are nearly flat, but there would be no intelligent beings in such regions to
  3309. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3310. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (8 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3311. observe the different number of effective dimensions.
  3312. Another problem is that there are at least four different string theories (open strings and three different closed
  3313. string theories) and millions of ways in which the extra dimensions predicted by string theory could be curled
  3314. up. Why should just one string theory and one kind of curling up be picked out? For a time there seemed no
  3315. answer, and progress got bogged down. Then, from about 1994, people started discovering what are called
  3316. dualities: different string theories and different ways of curling up the extra dimensions could lead to the same
  3317. results in four dimensions. Moreover, as well as particles, which occupy a single point of space, and strings,
  3318. which are lines, there were found to be other objects called p-branes, which occupied two-dimensional or
  3319. higher-dimensional volumes in space. (A particle can be regarded as a 0-brane and a string as a 1-brane but
  3320. there were also p-branes for p=2 to p=9.) What this seems to indicate is that there is a sort of democracy
  3321. among supergravity, string, and p-brane theories: they seem to fit together but none can be said to be more
  3322. fundamental than the others. They appear to be different approximations to some fundamental theory that are
  3323. valid in different situations.
  3324. People have searched for this underlying theory, but without any success so far. However, I believe there may
  3325. not be any single formulation of the fundamental theory any more than, as Godel showed, one could formulate
  3326. arithmetic in terms of a single set of axioms. Instead it may be like maps – you can’t use a single map to
  3327. describe the surface of the earth or an anchor ring: you need at least two maps in the case of the earth and four
  3328. for the anchor ring to cover every point. Each map is valid only in a limited region, but different maps will have a
  3329. region of overlap. The collection of maps provides a complete description of the surface. Similarly, in physics it
  3330. may be necessary to use different formulations in different situations, but two different formulations would agree
  3331. in situations where they can both be applied. The whole collection of different formulations could be regarded
  3332. as a complete unified theory, though one that could not be expressed in terms of a single set of postulates.
  3333. But can there really be such a unified theory? Or are we perhaps just chasing a mirage? There seem to be
  3334. three possibilities:
  3335. 1. There really is a complete unified theory (or a collection of overlapping formulations), which we will someday
  3336. discover if we are smart enough.
  3337. 2. There is no ultimate theory of the universe, just an infinite sequence of theories that describe the universe
  3338. more and more accurately.
  3339. 3. There is no theory of the universe: events cannot be predicted beyond a certain extent but occur in a random
  3340. and arbitrary manner.
  3341. Some would argue for the third possibility on the grounds that if there were a complete set of laws, that would
  3342. infringe God’s freedom to change his mind and intervene in the world. It’s a bit like the old paradox: can God
  3343. make a stone so heavy that he can’t lift it? But the idea that God might want to change his mind is an example
  3344. of the fallacy, pointed out by St. Augustine, of imagining God as a being existing in time: time is a property only
  3345. of the universe that God created. Presumably, he knew what he intended when he set it up!
  3346. With the advent of quantum mechanics, we have come to recognize that events cannot be predicted with
  3347. complete accuracy but that there is always a degree of uncertainty. If one likes, one could ascribe this
  3348. randomness to the intervention of God, but it would be a very strange kind of intervention: there is no evidence
  3349. that it is directed toward any purpose. Indeed, if it were, it would by definition not be random. In modern times,
  3350. we have effectively removed the third possibility above by redefining the goal of science: our aim is to formulate
  3351. a set of laws that enables us to predict events only up to the limit set by the uncertainty principle.
  3352. The second possibility, that there is an infinite sequence of more and more refined theories, is in agreement
  3353. with all our experience so far. On many occasions we have increased the sensitivity of our measurements or
  3354. made a new class of observations, only to discover new phenomena that were not predicted by the existing
  3355. theory, and to account for these we have had to develop a more advanced theory. It would therefore not be
  3356. very surprising if the present generation of grand unified theories was wrong in claiming that nothing essentially
  3357. new will happen between the electroweak unification energy of about 100 GeV and the grand unification energy
  3358. of about a thousand million million GeV. We might indeed expect to find several new layers of structure more
  3359. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3360. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (9 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3361. basic than the quarks and electrons that we now regard as “elementary” particles.
  3362. However, it seems that gravity may provide a limit to this sequence of “boxes within boxes.” If one had a
  3363. particle with an energy above what is called the Planck energy, ten million million million GeV (1 followed by
  3364. nineteen zeros), its mass would be so concentrated that it would cut itself off from the rest of the universe and
  3365. form a little black hole. Thus it does seem that the sequence of more and more refined theories should have
  3366. some limit as we go to higher and higher energies, so that there should be some ultimate theory of the
  3367. universe. Of course, the Planck energy is a very long way from the energies of around a hundred GeV, which
  3368. are the most that we can produce in the laboratory at the present time. We shall not bridge that gap with
  3369. particle accelerators in the foreseeable future! The very early stages of the universe, however, are an arena
  3370. where such energies must have occurred. I think that there is a good chance that the study of the early
  3371. universe and the requirements of mathematical consistency will lead us to a complete unified theory within the
  3372. lifetime of some of us who are around today, always presuming we don’t blow ourselves up first.
  3373. What would it mean if we actually did discover the ultimate theory of the universe? As was explained in Chapter
  3374. 1, we could never be quite sure that we had indeed found the correct theory, since theories can’t be proved.
  3375. But if the theory was mathematically consistent and always gave predictions that agreed with observations, we
  3376. could be reasonably confident that it was the right one. It would bring to an end a long and glorious chapter in
  3377. the history of humanity’s intellectual struggle to understand the universe. But it would also revolutionize the
  3378. ordinary person’s understanding of the laws that govern the universe. In Newton’s time it was possible for an
  3379. educated person to have a grasp of the whole of human knowledge, at least in outline. But since then, the pace
  3380. of the development of science has made this impossible. Because theories are always being changed to
  3381. account for new observations, they are never properly digested or simplified so that ordinary people can
  3382. understand them. You have to be a specialist, and even then you can only hope to have a proper grasp of a
  3383. small proportion of the scientific theories. Further, the rate of progress is so rapid that what one learns at school
  3384. or university is always a bit out of date. Only a few people can keep up with the rapidly advancing frontier of
  3385. knowledge, and they have to devote their whole time to it and specialize in a small area. The rest of the
  3386. population has little idea of the advances that are being made or the excitement they are generating. Seventy
  3387. years ago, if Eddington is to be believed, only two people understood the general theory of relativity. Nowadays
  3388. tens of thousands of university graduates do, and many millions of people are at least familiar with the idea. If a
  3389. complete unified theory was discovered, it would only be a matter of time before it was digested and simplified
  3390. in the same way and taught in schools, at least in outline. We would then all be able to have some
  3391. understanding of the laws that govern the universe and are responsible for our existence.
  3392. Even if we do discover a complete unified theory, it would not mean that we would be able to predict events in
  3393. general, for two reasons. The first is the limitation that the uncertainty principle of quantum mechanics sets on
  3394. our powers of prediction. There is nothing we can do to get around that. In practice, however, this first limitation
  3395. is less restrictive than the second one. It arises from the fact that we could not solve the equations of the theory
  3396. exactly, except in very simple situations. (We cannot even solve exactly for the motion of three bodies in
  3397. Newton’s theory of gravity, and the difficulty increases with the number of bodies and the complexity of the
  3398. theory.) We already know the laws that govern the behavior of matter under all but the most extreme
  3399. conditions. In particular, we know the basic laws that underlie all of chemistry and biology. Yet we have
  3400. certainly not reduced these subjects to the status of solved problems: we have, as yet, had little success in
  3401. predicting human behavior from mathematical equations! So even if we do find a complete set of basic laws,
  3402. there will still be in the years ahead the intellectually challenging task of developing better approximation
  3403. methods, so that we can make useful predictions of the probable outcomes in complicated and realistic
  3404. situations. A complete, consistent, unified theory is only the first step: our goal is a complete understanding of
  3405. the events around us, and of our own existence.
  3406. PREVIOUS NEXT
  3407. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3408. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (10 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3409. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 11
  3410. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/j.html (11 of 11) [2/20/2001 3:15:56 AM]
  3411. CHAPTER 12
  3412. CONCLUSION
  3413. We find ourselves in a bewildering world. We want to make sense of what we see around us and to ask: What
  3414. is the nature of the universe? What is our place in it and where did it and we come from? Why is it the way it is?
  3415. To try to answer these questions we adopt some “world picture.” Just as an infinite tower of tortoises supporting
  3416. the fiat earth is such a picture, so is the theory of superstrings. Both are theories of the universe, though the
  3417. latter is much more mathematical and precise than the former. Both theories lack observational evidence: no
  3418. one has ever seen a giant tortoise with the earth on its back, but then, no one has seen a superstring either.
  3419. However, the tortoise theory fails to be a good scientific theory because it predicts that people should be able to
  3420. fall off the edge of the world. This has not been found to agree with experience, unless that turns out to be the
  3421. explanation for the people who are supposed to have disappeared in the Bermuda Triangle!
  3422. The earliest theoretical attempts to describe and explain the universe involved the idea that events and natural
  3423. phenomena were controlled by spirits with human emotions who acted in a very humanlike and unpredictable
  3424. manner. These spirits inhabited natural objects, like rivers and mountains, including celestial bodies, like the
  3425. sun and moon. They had to be placated and their favor sought in order to ensure the fertility of the soil and the
  3426. rotation of the seasons. Gradually, however, it must have been noticed that there were certain regularities: the
  3427. sun always rose in the east and set in the west, whether or not a sacrifice had been made to the sun god.
  3428. Further, the sun, the moon, and the planets followed precise paths across the sky that could be predicted in
  3429. advance with considerable accuracy. The sun and the moon might still be gods, but they were gods who
  3430. obeyed strict laws, apparently without any exceptions, if one discounts stories like that of the sun stopping for
  3431. Joshua.
  3432. At first, these regularities and laws were obvious only in astronomy and a few other situations. However, as
  3433. civilization developed, and particularly in the last 300 years, more and more regularities and laws were
  3434. discovered. The success of these laws led Laplace at the beginning of the nineteenth century to postulate
  3435. scientific determinism; that is, he suggested that there would be a set of laws that would determine the
  3436. evolution of the universe precisely, given its configuration at one time.
  3437. Laplace’s determinism was incomplete in two ways. It did not say how the laws should be chosen and it did not
  3438. specify the initial configuration of the universe. These were left to God. God would choose how the universe
  3439. began and what laws it obeyed, but he would not intervene in the universe once it had started. In effect, God
  3440. was confined to the areas that nineteenth-century science did not understand.
  3441. We now know that Laplace’s hopes of determinism cannot be realized, at least in the terms he had in mind.
  3442. The uncertainty principle of quantum mechanics implies that certain pairs of quantities, such as the position and
  3443. velocity of a particle, cannot both be predicted with complete accuracy. Quantum mechanics deals with this
  3444. situation via a class of quantum theories in which particles don’t have well-defined positions and velocities but
  3445. are represented by a wave. These quantum theories are deterministic in the sense that they give laws for the
  3446. evolution of the wave with time. Thus if one knows the wave at one time, one can calculate it at any other time.
  3447. The unpredictable, random element comes in only when we try to interpret the wave in terms of the positions
  3448. and velocities of particles. But maybe that is our mistake: maybe there are no particle positions and velocities,
  3449. but only waves. It is just that we try to fit the waves to our preconceived ideas of positions and velocities. The
  3450. resulting mismatch is the cause of the apparent unpredictability.
  3451. In effect, we have redefined the task of science to be the discovery of laws that will enable us to predict events
  3452. up to the limits set by the uncertainty principle. The question remains, however: how or why were the laws and
  3453. the initial state of the universe chosen?
  3454. In this book I have given special prominence to the laws that govern gravity, because it is gravity that shapes
  3455. the large-scale structure of the universe, even though it is the weakest of the four categories of forces. The
  3456. laws of gravity were incompatible with the view held until quite recently that the universe is unchanging in time:
  3457. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 12
  3458. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/k.html (1 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:08 AM]
  3459. the fact that gravity is always attractive implies that the universe must be either expanding or contracting.
  3460. According to the general theory of relativity, there must have been a state of infinite density in the past, the big
  3461. bang, which would have been an effective beginning of time. Similarly, if the whole universe recollapsed, there
  3462. must be another state of infinite density in the future, the big crunch, which would be an end of time. Even if the
  3463. whole universe did not recollapse, there would be singularities in any localized regions that collapsed to form
  3464. black holes. These singularities would be an end of time for anyone who fell into the black hole. At the big bang
  3465. and other singularities, all the laws would have broken down, so God would still have had complete freedom to
  3466. choose what happened and how the universe began.
  3467. When we combine quantum mechanics with general relativity, there seems to be a new possibility that did not
  3468. arise before: that space and time together might form a finite, four-dimensional space without singularities or
  3469. boundaries, like the surface of the earth but with more dimensions. It seems that this idea could explain many
  3470. of the observed features of the universe, such as its large-scale uniformity and also the smaller-scale
  3471. departures from homogeneity, like galaxies, stars, and even human beings. It could even account for the arrow
  3472. of time that we observe. But if the universe is completely self-contained, with no singularities or boundaries,
  3473. and completely described by a unified theory, that has profound implications for the role of God as Creator.
  3474. Einstein once asked the question: “How much choice did God have in constructing the universe?” If the no
  3475. boundary proposal is correct, he had no freedom at all to choose initial conditions. He would, of course, still
  3476. have had the freedom to choose the laws that the universe obeyed. This, however, may not really have been all
  3477. that much of a choice; there may well be only one, or a small number, of complete unified theories, such as the
  3478. heterotic string theory, that are self-consistent and allow the existence of structures as complicated as human
  3479. beings who can investigate the laws of the universe and ask about the nature of God.
  3480. Even if there is only one possible unified theory, it is just a set of rules and equations. What is it that breathes
  3481. fire into the equations and makes a universe for them to describe? The usual approach of science of
  3482. constructing a mathematical model cannot answer the questions of why there should be a universe for the
  3483. model to describe. Why does the universe go to all the bother of existing? Is the unified theory so compelling
  3484. that it brings about its own existence? Or does it need a creator, and, if so, does he have any other effect on
  3485. the universe? And who created him?
  3486. Up to now, most scientists have been too occupied with the development of new theories that describe what
  3487. the universe is to ask the question why. On the other hand, the people whose business it is to ask why, the
  3488. philosophers, have not been able to keep up with the advance of scientific theories. In the eighteenth century,
  3489. philosophers considered the whole of human knowledge, including science, to be their field and discussed
  3490. questions such as: did the universe have a beginning? However, in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries,
  3491. science became too technical and mathematical for the philosophers, or anyone else except a few specialists.
  3492. Philosophers reduced the scope of their inquiries so much that Wittgenstein, the most famous philosopher of
  3493. this century, said, “The sole remaining task for philosophy is the analysis of language.” What a comedown from
  3494. the great tradition of philosophy from Aristotle to Kant!
  3495. However, if we do discover a complete theory, it should in time be understandable in broad principle by
  3496. everyone, not just a few scientists. Then we shall all, philosophers, scientists, and just ordinary people, be able
  3497. to take part in the discussion of the question of why it is that we and the universe exist. If we find the answer to
  3498. that, it would be the ultimate triumph of human reason – for then we would know the mind of God.
  3499. ALBERT EINSTEIN
  3500. Einstein’s connection with the politics of the nuclear bomb is well known: he signed the famous letter to
  3501. President Franklin Roosevelt that persuaded the United States to take the idea seriously, and he engaged in
  3502. postwar efforts to prevent nuclear war. But these were not just the isolated actions of a scientist dragged into
  3503. the world of politics. Einstein’s life was, in fact, to use his own words, “divided between politics and equations.”
  3504. Einstein’s earliest political activity came during the First World War, when he was a professor in Berlin.
  3505. Sickened by what he saw as the waste of human lives, he became involved in antiwar demonstrations. His
  3506. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 12
  3507. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/k.html (2 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:08 AM]
  3508. advocacy of civil disobedience and public encouragement of people to refuse conscription did little to endear
  3509. him to his colleagues. Then, following the war, he directed his efforts toward reconciliation and improving
  3510. international relations. This too did not make him popular, and soon his politics were making it difficult for him to
  3511. visit the United States, even to give lectures.
  3512. Einstein’s second great cause was Zionism. Although he was Jewish by descent, Einstein rejected the biblical
  3513. idea of God. However, a growing awareness of anti-Semitism, both before and during the First World War, led
  3514. him gradually to identify with the Jewish community, and later to become an outspoken supporter of Zionism.
  3515. Once more unpopularity did not stop him from speaking his mind. His theories came under attack; an
  3516. anti-Einstein organization was even set up. One man was convicted of inciting others to murder Einstein (and
  3517. fined a mere six dollars). But Einstein was phlegmatic. When a book was published entitled 100 Authors
  3518. Against Einstein, he retorted, “If I were wrong, then one would have been enough!”
  3519. In 1933, Hitler came to power. Einstein was in America, and declared he would not return to Germany. Then,
  3520. while Nazi militia raided his house and confiscated his bank account, a Berlin newspaper displayed the
  3521. headline “Good News from Einstein – He’s Not Coming Back.” In the face of the Nazi threat, Einstein
  3522. renounced pacifism, and eventually, fearing that German scientists would build a nuclear bomb, proposed that
  3523. the United States should develop its own. But even before the first atomic bomb had been detonated, he was
  3524. publicly warning of the dangers of nuclear war and proposing international control of nuclear weaponry.
  3525. Throughout his life, Einstein’s efforts toward peace probably achieved little that would last – and certainly won
  3526. him few friends. His vocal support of the Zionist cause, however, was duly recognized in 1952, when he was
  3527. offered the presidency of Israel. He declined, saying he thought he was too naive in politics. But perhaps his
  3528. real reason was different: to quote him again, “Equations are more important to me, because politics is for the
  3529. present, but an equation is something for eternity.”
  3530. GALILEO GALILEI
  3531. Galileo, perhaps more than any other single person, was responsible for the birth of modern science. His
  3532. renowned conflict with the Catholic Church was central to his philosophy, for Galileo was one of the first to
  3533. argue that man could hope to understand how the world works, and, moreover, that we could do this by
  3534. observing the real world.
  3535. Galileo had believed Copernican theory (that the planets orbited the sun) since early on, but it was only when
  3536. he found the evidence needed to support the idea that he started to publicly support it. He wrote about
  3537. Copernicus’s theory in Italian (not the usual academic Latin), and soon his views became widely supported
  3538. outside the universities. This annoyed the Aristotelian professors, who united against him seeking to persuade
  3539. the Catholic Church to ban Copernicanism.
  3540. Galileo, worried by this, traveled to Rome to speak to the ecclesiastical authorities. He argued that the Bible
  3541. was not intended to tell us anything about scientific theories, and that it was usual to assume that, where the
  3542. Bible conflicted with common sense, it was being allegorical. But the Church was afraid of a scandal that might
  3543. undermine its fight against Protestantism, and so took repressive measures. It declared Copernicanism “false
  3544. and erroneous” in 1616, and commanded Galileo never again to “defend or hold” the doctrine. Galileo
  3545. acquiesced.
  3546. In 1623, a longtime friend of Galileo’s became the Pope. Immediately Galileo tried to get the 1616 decree
  3547. revoked. He failed, but he did manage to get permission to write a book discussing both Aristotelian and
  3548. Copernican theories, on two conditions: he would not take sides and would come to the conclusion that man
  3549. could in any case not determine how the world worked because God could bring about the same effects in
  3550. ways unimagined by man, who could not place restrictions on God’s omnipotence.
  3551. The book, Dialogue Concerning the Two Chief World Systems, was completed and published in 1632, with the
  3552. full backing of the censors – and was immediately greeted throughout Europe as a literary and philosophical
  3553. masterpiece. Soon the Pope, realizing that people were seeing the book as a convincing argument in favor of
  3554. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 12
  3555. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/k.html (3 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:08 AM]
  3556. Copernicanism, regretted having allowed its publication. The Pope argued that although the book had the
  3557. official blessing of the censors, Galileo had nevertheless contravened the 1616 decree. He brought Galileo
  3558. before the Inquisition, who sentenced him to house arrest for life and commanded him to publicly renounce
  3559. Copernicanism. For a second time, Galileo acquiesced.
  3560. Galileo remained a faithful Catholic, but his belief in the independence of science had not been crushed. Four
  3561. years before his death in 1642, while he was still under house arrest, the manuscript of his second major book
  3562. was smuggled to a publisher in Holland. It was this work, referred to as Two New Sciences, even more than his
  3563. support for Copernicus, that was to be the genesis of modern physics.
  3564. ISAAC NEWTON
  3565. Isaac Newton was not a pleasant man. His relations with other academics were notorious, with most of his later
  3566. life spent embroiled in heated disputes. Following publication of Principia Mathematica – surely the most
  3567. influential book ever written in physics – Newton had risen rapidly into public prominence. He was appointed
  3568. president of the Royal Society and became the first scientist ever to be knighted.
  3569. Newton soon clashed with the Astronomer Royal, John Flamsteed, who had earlier provided Newton with
  3570. much-needed data for Principia, but was now withholding information that Newton wanted. Newton would not
  3571. take no for an answer: he had himself appointed to the governing body of the Royal Observatory and then tried
  3572. to force immediate publication of the data. Eventually he arranged for Flamsteed’s work to be seized and
  3573. prepared for publication by Flamsteed’s mortal enemy, Edmond Halley. But Flamsteed took the case to court
  3574. and, in the nick of time, won a court order preventing distribution of the stolen work. Newton was incensed and
  3575. sought his revenge by systematically deleting all references to Flamsteed in later editions of Principia.
  3576. A more serious dispute arose with the German philosopher Gottfried Leibniz. Both Leibniz and Newton had
  3577. independently developed a branch of mathematics called calculus, which underlies most of modern physics.
  3578. Although we now know that Newton discovered calculus years before Leibniz, he published his work much
  3579. later. A major row ensued over who had been first, with scientists vigorously defending both contenders. It is
  3580. remarkable, however, that most of the articles appearing in defense of Newton were originally written by his
  3581. own hand – and only published in the name of friends! As the row grew, Leibniz made the mistake of appealing
  3582. to the Royal Society to resolve the dispute. Newton, as president, appointed an “impartial” committee to
  3583. investigate, coincidentally consisting entirely of Newton’s friends! But that was not all: Newton then wrote the
  3584. committee’s report himself and had the Royal Society publish it, officially accusing Leibniz of plagiarism. Still
  3585. unsatisfied, he then wrote an anonymous review of the report in the Royal Society’s own periodical. Following
  3586. the death of Leibniz, Newton is reported to have declared that he had taken great satisfaction in “breaking
  3587. Leibniz’s heart.”
  3588. During the period of these two disputes, Newton had already left Cambridge and academe. He had been active
  3589. in anti-Catholic politics at Cambridge, and later in Parliament, and was rewarded eventually with the lucrative
  3590. post of Warden of the Royal Mint. Here he used his talents for deviousness and vitriol in a more socially
  3591. acceptable way, successfully conducting a major campaign against counterfeiting, even sending several men to
  3592. their death on the gallows.
  3593. PREVIOUS NEXT
  3594. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Chapter 12
  3595. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/k.html (4 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:08 AM]
  3596. GLOSSARY
  3597. Absolute zero: The lowest possible temperature, at which substances contain no heat energy.
  3598. Acceleration: The rate at which the speed of an object is changing.
  3599. Anthropic principle: We see the universe the way it is because if it were different we would not be here to
  3600. observe it.
  3601. Antiparticle: Each type of matter particle has a corresponding antiparticle. When a particle collides with its
  3602. antiparticle, they annihilate, leaving only energy.
  3603. Atom: The basic unit of ordinary matter, made up of a tiny nucleus (consisting of protons and neutrons)
  3604. surrounded by orbiting electrons.
  3605. Big bang: The singularity at the beginning of the universe.
  3606. Big crunch: The singularity at the end of the universe.
  3607. Black hole: A region of space-time from which nothing, not even light, can escape, because gravity is so
  3608. strong.
  3609. Casimir effect: The attractive pressure between two flat, parallel metal plates placed very near to each other in
  3610. a vacuum. The pressure is due to a reduction in the usual number of virtual particles in the space between the
  3611. plates.
  3612. Chandrasekhar limit: The maximum possible mass of a stable cold star, above which it must collapse into a
  3613. black hole.
  3614. Conservation of energy: The law of science that states that energy (or its equivalent in mass) can neither be
  3615. created nor destroyed.
  3616. Coordinates: Numbers that specify the position of a point in space and time.
  3617. Cosmological constant: A mathematical device used by Einstein to give space-time an inbuilt tendency to
  3618. expand.
  3619. Cosmology: The study of the universe as a whole.
  3620. Dark matter: Matter in galaxies, clusters, and possibly between clusters, that can not be observed directly but
  3621. can be detected by its gravitational effect. As much as 90 percent of the mass of the universe may be in the
  3622. form of dark matter.
  3623. Duality: A correspondence between apparently different theories that lead to the same physical results.
  3624. Einstein-Rosen bridge: A thin tube of space-time linking two black holes. Also see Wormhole.
  3625. Electric charge: A property of a particle by which it may repel (or attract) other particles that have a charge of
  3626. similar (or opposite) sign.
  3627. Electromagnetic force: The force that arises between particles with electric charge; the second strongest of
  3628. the four fundamental forces.
  3629. Electron: A particle with negative electric charge that orbits the nucleus of an atom.
  3630. Electroweak unification energy: The energy (around 100 GeV) above which the distinction between the
  3631. electromagnetic force and the weak force disappears.
  3632. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Glossary
  3633. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/l.html (1 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:19 AM]
  3634. Elementary particle: A particle that, it is believed, cannot be subdivided.
  3635. Event: A point in space-time, specified by its time and place.
  3636. Event horizon: The boundary of a black hole.
  3637. Exclusion principle: The idea that two identical spin-1/2 particles cannot have (within the limits set by the
  3638. uncertainty principle) both the same position and the same velocity.
  3639. Field: Something that exists throughout space and time, as opposed to a particle that exists at only one point at
  3640. a time.
  3641. Frequency: For a wave, the number of complete cycles per second.
  3642. Gamma rays: Electromagnetic rays of very short wavelength, produced in radio-active decay or by collisions of
  3643. elementary particles.
  3644. General relativity: Einstein’s theory based on the idea that the laws of science should be the same for all
  3645. observers, no matter how they are moving. It explains the force of gravity in terms of the curvature of a
  3646. four-dimensional space-time.
  3647. Geodesic: The shortest (or longest) path between two points.
  3648. Grand unification energy: The energy above which, it is believed, the electro-magnetic force, weak force, and
  3649. strong force become indistinguishable from each other.
  3650. Grand unified theory (GUT): A theory which unifies the electromagnetic, strong, and weak forces.
  3651. Imaginary time: Time measured using imaginary numbers.
  3652. Light cone: A surface in space-time that marks out the possible directions for light rays passing through a
  3653. given event.
  3654. Light-second (light-year): The distance traveled by light in one second (year).
  3655. Magnetic field: The field responsible for magnetic forces, now incorporated along with the electric field, into the
  3656. electromagnetic field.
  3657. Mass: The quantity of matter in a body; its inertia, or resistance to acceleration.
  3658. Microwave background radiation: The radiation from the glowing of the hot early universe, now so greatly
  3659. red-shifted that it appears not as light but as microwaves (radio waves with a wavelength of a few centimeters).
  3660. Also see COBE, on page 145.
  3661. Naked singularity: A space-time singularity not surrounded by a black hole.
  3662. Neutrino: An extremely light (possibly massless) particle that is affected only by the weak force and gravity.
  3663. Neutron: An uncharged particle, very similar to the proton, which accounts for roughly half the particles in an
  3664. atomic nucleus.
  3665. Neutron star: A cold star, supported by the exclusion principle repulsion between neutrons.
  3666. No boundary condition: The idea that the universe is finite but has no boundary (in imaginary time).
  3667. Nuclear fusion: The process by which two nuclei collide and coalesce to form a single, heavier nucleus.
  3668. Nucleus: The central part of an atom, consisting only of protons and neutrons, held together by the strong
  3669. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Glossary
  3670. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/l.html (2 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:19 AM]
  3671. force.
  3672. Particle accelerator: A machine that, using electromagnets, can accelerate moving charged particles, giving
  3673. them more energy.
  3674. Phase: For a wave, the position in its cycle at a specified time: a measure of whether it is at a crest, a trough,
  3675. or somewhere in between.
  3676. Photon: A quantum of light.
  3677. Planck’s quantum principle: The idea that light (or any other classical waves) can be emitted or absorbed
  3678. only in discrete quanta, whose energy is proportional to their wavelength.
  3679. Positron: The (positively charged) antiparticle of the electron.
  3680. Primordial black hole: A black hole created in the very early universe.
  3681. Proportional: ‘X is proportional to Y’ means that when Y is multiplied by any number, so is X. ‘X is inversely
  3682. proportional to Y’ means that when Y is multiplied by any number, X is divided by that number.
  3683. Proton: A positively charged particle, very similar to the neutron, that accounts for roughly half the particles in
  3684. the nucleus of most atoms.
  3685. Pulsar: A rotating neutron star that emits regular pulses of radio waves.
  3686. Quantum: The indivisible unit in which waves may be emitted or absorbed.
  3687. Quantum chromodynamics (QCD): The theory that describes the interactions of quarks and gluons.
  3688. Quantum mechanics: The theory developed from Planck’s quantum principle and Heisenberg’s uncertainty
  3689. principle.
  3690. Quark: A (charged) elementary particle that feels the strong force. Protons and neutrons are each composed of
  3691. three quarks.
  3692. Radar: A system using pulsed radio waves to detect the position of objects by measuring the time it takes a
  3693. single pulse to reach the object and be reflected back.
  3694. Radioactivity: The spontaneous breakdown of one type of atomic nucleus into another.
  3695. Red shift: The reddening of light from a star that is moving away from us, due to the Doppler effect.
  3696. Singularity: A point in space-time at which the space-time curvature becomes infinite.
  3697. Singularity theorem: A theorem that shows that a singularity must exist under certain circumstances – in
  3698. particular, that the universe must have started with a singularity.
  3699. Space-time: The four-dimensional space whose points are events.
  3700. Spatial dimension: Any of the three dimensions that are spacelike – that is, any except the time dimension.
  3701. Special relativity: Einstein’s theory based on the idea that the laws of science should be the same for all
  3702. observers, no matter how they are moving, in the absence of gravitational phenomena.
  3703. Spectrum: The component frequencies that make up a wave. The visible part of the sun’s spectrum can be
  3704. seen in a rainbow.
  3705. Spin: An internal property of elementary particles, related to, but not identical to, the everyday concept of spin.
  3706. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Glossary
  3707. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/l.html (3 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:19 AM]
  3708. Stationary state: One that is not changing with time: a sphere spinning at a constant rate is stationary because
  3709. it looks identical at any given instant.
  3710. String theory: A theory of physics in which particles are described as waves on strings. Strings have length but
  3711. no other dimension.
  3712. Strong force: The strongest of the four fundamental forces, with the shortest range of all. It holds the quarks
  3713. together within protons and neutrons, and holds the protons and neutrons together to form atoms.
  3714. Uncertainty principle: The principle, formulated by Heisenberg, that one can never be exactly sure of both the
  3715. position and the velocity of a particle; the more accurately one knows the one, the less accurately one can
  3716. know the other.
  3717. Virtual particle: In quantum mechanics, a particle that can never be directly detected, but whose existence
  3718. does have measurable effects.
  3719. Wave/particle duality: The concept in quantum mechanics that there is no distinction between waves and
  3720. particles; particles may sometimes behave like waves, and waves like particles.
  3721. Wavelength: For a wave, the distance between two adjacent troughs or two adjacent crests.
  3722. Weak force: The second weakest of the four fundamental forces, with a very short range. It affects all matter
  3723. particles, but not force-carrying particles.
  3724. Weight: The force exerted on a body by a gravitational field. It is proportional to, but not the same as, its mass.
  3725. White dwarf: A stable cold star, supported by the exclusion principle repulsion between electrons.
  3726. Wormhole: A thin tube of space-time connecting distant regions of the universe. Wormholes might also link to
  3727. parallel or baby universes and could provide the possibility of time travel.
  3728. PREVIOUS NEXT
  3729. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Glossary
  3730. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/l.html (4 of 4) [2/20/2001 3:16:19 AM]
  3731. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
  3732. Many people have helped me in writing this book. My scientific colleagues have without exception been
  3733. inspiring. Over the years my principal associates and collaborators were Roger Penrose, Robert Geroch,
  3734. Brandon Carter, George Ellis, Gary Gibbons, Don Page, and Jim Hartle. I owe a lot to them, and to my
  3735. research students, who have always given me help when needed.
  3736. One of my students, Brian Whitt, gave me a lot of help writing the first edition of this book. My editor at Bantam
  3737. Books, Peter Guzzardi, made innumerable comments which improved the book considerably. In addition, for
  3738. this edition, I would like to thank Andrew Dunn, who helped me revise the text.
  3739. I could not have written this book without my communication system. The software, called Equalizer, was
  3740. donated by Walt Waltosz of Words Plus Inc., in Lancaster, California. My speech synthesizer was donated by
  3741. Speech Plus, of Sunnyvale, California. The synthesizer and laptop computer were mounted on my wheelchair
  3742. by David Mason, of Cambridge Adaptive Communication Ltd. With this system I can communicate better now
  3743. than before I lost my voice.
  3744. I have had a number of secretaries and assistants over the years in which I wrote and revised this book. On the
  3745. secretarial side, I’m very grateful to Judy Fella, Ann Ralph, Laura Gentry, Cheryl Billington, and Sue Masey. My
  3746. assistants have been Colin Williams, David Thomas, and Raymond Laflamme, Nick Phillips, Andrew Dunn,
  3747. Stuart Jamieson, Jonathan Brenchley, Tim Hunt, Simon Gill, Jon Rogers, and Tom Kendall. They, my nurses,
  3748. colleagues, friends, and family have enabled me to live a very full life and to pursue my research despite my
  3749. disability.
  3750. Stephen Hawking
  3751. ABOUT THE AUTHOR
  3752. Stephen Hawking, who was born in 1942 on the anniversary of Galileo’s death, holds Isaac Newton’s chair as
  3753. Lucasian Professor of Mathematics at the University of Cambridge. Widely regarded as the most brilliant
  3754. theoretical physicist since Einstein, he is also the author of Black Holes and Baby Universes, published in 1993,
  3755. as well as numerous scientific papers and books.
  3756. PREVIOUS
  3757. A Brief History of Time - Stephen Hawking... Acknowledgments
  3758. file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/blahh/Stephen Hawking - A brief history of time/m.html [2/20/2001 3:16:30 AM]
Add Comment
Please, Sign In to add comment